catalog federal

7/22/2019 Catalog Federal

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/catalog-federal 1/149

“All Over The World”

CATALOGUE

2006

L.V. Distribution, Protection, Control, Energy Quality, Measurement Devices and Panel Systems



Manufactures according to CE Certificate.

Protects the energy transmission line against

overcurrent.

Function of remote reading and interference

(RS232,RS484 standard)GPRS,TCP/IP and FIBER

OPTIK is optional.

Follow the all device in network by CLINT software

on Internet.

Read the last failure of Oscillogram or instant

current curves. Read all parameters on the screen simultaneously.

Select suitable fixed-time and inverse-time

characteristic according to IEC an ANSI standards

Adjust the function by keys on the relay and

communication ports easily.

The signals can remain continuously after the

failure, but can be reset by remote control or keys.

If the relay is operated without the signals wiped up,

previous signals can be wiped up and the new signals

can remain.

Enter 2 set values belongs to current

Over Current Relay

“All Over the World”



11

33

44

55

66

77

88

99

1010

1111

1212

1313

1414

1515

1616

1717

1818

1919

2020

Automatic Control Unit of Heating

Systems for Passenger Coach

NH (H.R.C.) Fuses and Fuse Bases

Air Circuit Breakers

Load Break Switches

Cam Switches

Contactors

Residual Current Circuit Breakers

L.V. Current Transformers

L.V. Capacitors

Panelmeters

Miniature Circuit Breakers

Motor Protection Switches

L.V. Circuit Breakers

Electronic Products and Relays

Multi-Tariff Electronic Energy Meters

Vertical Type Switch Fuses

Thermal Overload Relay

EasyPan Distribution Boards

Technical Information

Reactive Power Control Relays

Design and specifications are subject to changes without notice.

D i s t r i b u t i o n & P r o t e c t i o n P r o d u

c t s

P

a n e l S y s t e m s

M e a s u r e m e n t

E n e r g y Q u a l i t y

C o n t r o l P r o d u c t s

T e c h n i c a l

22



Low Voltage Protection,Control and MeasurementDevices

Testing LaboratoriesFederal Electric is the leading low voltage electrical product manufacturing company

in Turkey, which has the first and sole Short Circuit Test Laboratory, established to

give a direction for R&D operations. In this laboratory, 100 kA testing current can

be produced from 440V.

Local and Foreign MarketFederal Electric continous its marketing and sales activities through international

trade organizations to meet the needs of local and international customers.

Federal Electric’s export activity has grown successfully every year.Federal Electric

is currently exporting its products to more than 40 countries which the main ones

are France, Germany, England, Sweden, Italy, Saudi Arabia, Egypt, Syria, Jordan,

Iraq, Russia, Sri Lanka.

Quality AssuranceFederal Electric, which is known to the world market, has been working according

to ISO 9001:2000 standards. Our working principles are based on continuous

development and satisfaction of the customer. All of this period is followed by static

technique from design to purchasing, from process control to storage and logistics,

from training and development to after sale services through the ERP software

system.

DesignTo maintain the high level of technology and improve the product image, our R&D

dept. utilizes the program UNIGRAPHICS. This is one the most advanced programs

in CAD-CAM and aids this department to meet the demands of further development.

ProductionAt Federal Electric semi-automatic lines carry out assembly. Items come to the

line as components are assembled and leave the line ready for testing. %95 of

the raw material, which are used, at manufacturing, procured from domestic

market, silver alloyed contacts and bimetals are procured from the international

market. Most of its production capacity is being exported to more than 40 countries;

in Europe, Middle East and USA.



1/1

General Information About Circuit Breakers

Protection System of Circuit Breakers Against the Earth Residual Current

General Technical Characteristics of Circuit Breakers

Technical Characteristics and Order Codes of Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Selection Table

Variation in Thermal Element Setting Currents According to Ambient Temperatures

Selectivity

Determination of Short - Circuit Current

Accessories for the Circuit Breakers

Automatic Inverser System

Electrical Circuit Diagram of Motor Operating Mechanism

Time - Current Curves of Circuit Breakers

Dimensions of Circuit Breakers

2

5

6

8

12

13

14

17

19

23

24

25

26

-2006

F21F22

F10F11

F12 F31F32F33

F61F62

F71F51F52F53

F82F83

F111EF112E

F91EF92E

F82EF83E

F101EF102E

11

LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Circuit Breakers (Electronic Type)

Circuit Breakers (Thermal-Magnetic Type)

CONTENTS

LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Circuit Breakers (Thermal-Magnetic Type)

Circuit Breakers (Electronic Type)

CONTENTS



1/2 -2006

How overcurrent occurs...?

Releases :

Overcurrent Releases :General :

Definition :

Circuit breaker is a mechanical device, capable ofmaking,carrying and breaking currents under normal circuitconditions and also making, carrying for a specified timeand breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit

conditions such as short-circuit and over-current.Operating principle of Circuit Breaker :

Most important function of the circuit breaker is the protectionof the circuit at the abnormal operating conditions besidesmaking, carrying and breaking the currents. Circuit breakersare equipped with some units to carry out protection function.Opening units of low voltage circuit breakers are definedas a release according to IEC 60947-2/EN 60947-2 standardsand CE certificate.

Values of all currents which exceeds to the rated currents

are defined as overcurrent. Overcurrent occurs when thereis an increase in the power, which is being absorbed fromthe circuit or when a short circuit occurs. Both of theovercurrents are dangerous for electrical circuits. Overcurrentscause thermal and dynamic forces in electrical circuits.Overcurrents which occur with increasing the power can be2 or 3 fold from rated current.Due to short-circuit current, abnormally high current occursaccording to feature of electrical circuit. For example this canbe 3,2 kA at 100 kVA transformer and 60 kA at the 2500 kVAtransformer.Electrical devices such as transformers, generators, motors,capacitors, cables... etc. have a value of withstand (I2t) againstthe thermal and dynamic forces due to when a short-circuitoccurs, the overcurrent passing through the circuit causes

a temperature rise. As it is shown on the formula, the valueof current is so important as well as the period of time ofcurrent. When current builds up, it is necessary to decreasethe time of flow current in order to hold the I2t value less

A release which causes a mechanical switching device toopen with or without time-delay when the current in therelease exceeds a predetermined value.

A release which permits a circuit breaker to open, withoutany intentional time delay.- Overcurrent releases

- Undervoltage releases- Shunt releasesAll of the breakers are equipped with overcurrent releases.Undervoltage and shunt releases are not standardaccessories, but they can be fixed on the breaker by therequest of customer.

Fig-1 Time-current curve ofcircuit breaker

I2xt

I

t

Breaker

I= Passing currentt= Time of passing current

Device

I

Time delay overcurrent releases (Category B) :

An over current release intended to operate at the end ofthe time delay. The current passing through the circuitreaches the value of adjusted short-circuit current, breakerdoesn’t open rapidly. (Only after some time delay. In otherterms they permitted the short-circuit current if the time isnot dangerous for equipment and cable.) This process isto be realized by giving delayed signal the opening coil bymeans of electronic circuit at the electronic breakers. Delayovercurrent releases are usually connected to main circuitat the beginning of line for selectivity.

Without time-delay overcurrent releases(Category A) :

When the current passing through the circuit increases thevalue of determined current, breaker rapidly opens thecircuit. These kind of releases especially effect at highovercurrent which occurs as a result of short-circuit. Whena current builds-up, it is necessary to decrease the breakingtime of current around ms in order to hold I2t value low.

Short-circuit overcurrent releases :

They are manufactured in two categories :- Without time delay overcurrent releases (Category A)- Time - delay overcurrent releases (Category B).

than determineted value. Low voltage circuit breakers provideconfident protection by opening the circuit under the I

2tvalue for device, (Figure-1)

A release which permits a mechanical switching device toopen or close, with or without time-delay ,when the voltageacross the terminals of the release falls below a predeterminedvalue. Whenever the voltage falls below a predetermined levelor breaks one of phases, undervoltage release mechanism (ittrips) operates. When this condition occurs, the circuit breakertrips and can not be energized until the power has beenrestored to 85% of the rated voltage. The dropping or breakingof voltage causes many kind of break-down. For example, if

there is a disturbance of any one of the phases separately,this will cause the other phases to overload and burn themotor. This kind of break-down is prevented by installingundervoltage relay (customer supplied when required) in

Undervoltage Releases :

Pic-1 Inside of circuit breaker

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERSGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS



- Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers :

Magnetic Protection :For the protection over 3xIn short circuit.Another function of the circuit breaker is to protect circuitagainst short-circuits. Short-circuit occurs when differentphase or phase-neutral is in series. When a short-circuitoccurs, the current passing through the circuit causes amagnetic field and magnetization due to overcurrent. In thatcase the energy of system should be interrupted rapidly incomparision with thermal protection. So that breaker instantlyshould be trip to protect the load. Magnetic trip action isachieved by mechanical opening mechanism which operatesby magnetic field and magnetization. Magnetic elements

can be either fixed or adjustable by manufacturer, dependingupon the type of breaker.

- Circuit breakers with electronic overcurrentreleases :

The difference between breakers with bimetal and electronicis that the overcurrent releases for electronic breakers arecontrolled by an electronical circuit. The electronic control

is provided by a most precise 8 byte micro controller. Duringthe design of electronic circuit, worst possibilities which canoccur on the service have been taken into consideration.On high short-circuit currents (>15 In) directly tripping isensured without need for the electronic circuit. So, thepossibility of fault in electronic circuit is reduced to minimum.The tripping time of the electronic circuit breaker isindependent to the ambient temperature.Federal electronic breakers can be connected to computerby means of RS-232 protocol (customer supplied whenrequired). That disc of computer can be used instead ofcurrent measurement instrument.- It will be able to read the minimum, average,... etc. valuesof time constant (night-day) of the supplies current.

- It is possible to get statistical data promptly.- In case of overcurrent, the opening time of the circuitbreaker may be adjusted.-The rated current and magnetic opening adjustment canbe regulated precisely by computer.-External opening control can be given.-Electronic circuit breakers have a wide adjustable rangeof rated and short-circuit opening current.Electronic breaker units are intensive to ambient temperatureswithin a certain temperature range. The temperature rangefor most Federal circuit breaker trip units is - 30 °C to 60 °CElectronic circuit breaker provides wide possibility of usesbecause of it is tremendous technology and advantages.Also, electronic circuit breakers don’t effect from temperature.

Low voltage circuit breakers are manufactured as two typesaccording to type of overcurrent releases. These are: Thermal-Magnetic and Electronic circuit breakers.

As a definition; a release energized by a source of voltage.

A shunt trip provides remote controlled tripping of a circuitbreaker. Remote device can be a pushbutton, cut off switchor an other pilot device. Shunt releases trip consist of anintermittent rated selonoid tripping device installed in thebreaker on site or factory (customer supplied when required)The tripping device is energized by AC or DC voltage. Whenvoltage is applied to shunt trip release, it should trip between70% and 110% of the feeding voltage. (According to EN60947).

TYPES OF CIRCUIT BREAKER :

Shunt Trip Releases :

CURRENT- LIMITING CIRCUIT- BREAKERS :Definition :

During the operation of the breaker opening and closingwith handle, the position of moving contact at the positionON is held at pos1 At the position OFF is held at pos.3(Figure-4). Whenever a short-circuit occurs, at the circuitwhich has none limiting characteristic, the short-circuitcurrent causes an opposite magnetic field strength of theelectromagnet in the breaker. The electromagnet moves thetrip bar causing the circuit breaker to trip. This time isbetween 10-20 ms at 100,160,250 A Breakers.In addition to that, opposite magnetic field attracts themoving contact from pos-1 to pos-2 at Federal breakerswith limiting and contacts are held at this position. In otherwords, the contact does not come to the ON positionautomatically again. Opening of moving contact begins inthe first ms of short-circuit. Contact comes to pos-2 at firsttwo ms, complete breaking of arc finishes maximum 5-6 msThe handle position indicates the contact status : closed,opened or tripped ( a midway position). To restore serviceafter the breaker trips, the handle must first be moved fromthe center position (triped) to “OFF” to reset the mechanismand then to “ON”. This distinct trip point is particularlyadvantageous where breakers are group mounted, such as

in panelboard applications, because the handle positionclearly indicates the faulty circuit.

Operating principle :

A circuit breaker with a break-time short enough to preventthe short circuit current reaching its otherwise attainablepeak value.

breaker. Control of other phases have been done by usingcontactor so that as a general undervoltage relay feedsfrom two phase. (Figure-2)

-2006

K : Contactor (Coil AC 380 V)F4: Undervoltage release (UVR)Q1: Low voltage circuit breaker

Fig-2: Applicationof undervoltage

releases

U

K

K

L1

L2

L3

Load

A1

A2

F4

Q1

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERSGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS 11

Thermal Protection :For the protection between (1,1-3)xIn overcurrent.A bimetal consists of two strips of metal bonded together.Each strip has a different thermal rate of heat expansion.Heat due to excessive current causes the bimetal to bend,this causes the operating mechanism to trip, pushing thetrip bar and unlatch the contact. Bending of bimetal is directproportional to the current which passes through the contactsof the breaker. Building up current means increasing heat.By using this method thermal trip action is achieved throughthe use of a bimetal heated by over load current whichbigger than predetermined rated current. Thermal elements(bimetal) are calibrated and supplied for each current ratingby the manufacturer.



The function of the arc extinguisher (separator) is the confine,divide and extinguish an arc. During the moving contactseparates from the constant contact, the current flowsthrough air. This is defined as an arc. These are should beextinguished simultaneously.How arc is extinguished?When an interruption occurs and the contacts separate, thearc flows through the ionized region between the contactsinduces a magnetic field around the arc and arc extinguisher.As the lines of magnetic flux , force drive the arc into themetal plates, deionizing the gas dividing and cooling thearc as shown in Figure-6.

Arc Extinguisher :

Contacts :

Contact alloy is determined by taking into consideration thevalue of current which breaking and carrying in breaker.Generally, silver, carbon, nickel, wolfram alloys are used atbreaker. Silver, carbon alloys which constructed softconstraction are used on the constants (bottom) contacts.Silver-wolfram contacts which constructed more stiffconstructions are used moving (upper) contacts. Movingcontacts are constructed as a convex construction. So thatconvex and stiff alloy contacts set properly on the soft constantcontacts at the every opening and closing of breaker. So thisprovides the lowest passing withstand. Moving contact touchesproperly on the constant contacts for low touching withstand.Excessive contact press force causes the destruction ofcontacts at a short time. For this reason contact alloy is soimportant for the suitable opening and closing.

Bimetal :

A bimetal consists of two strips of metal bonded together.Each strip has a different thermal rate of heat expension.Heat due to excessive current causes the bimetal to bend.The bimetals having the greater rate of expansion will beon the outside (Longer boundary) of the bend curve. Totrips breaker, the bimetal must bend far enough to physicallythe trip bar and unlatch the contacts.

Fig-5 Short circuit current curve according to I-t

Peak value of expectedshort-circuit current

Peak value of limitingshort-circuit current

I max

I limit

:

:

I max

I limit

Expected short-circuit current

I

t (msec.)10 msec.5 msec.

Limit short-circuit current

The Advantages of Federal Current - LimitingCircuit Breakers

- The breakers protect transformers, cables and other devicesin the circuit in compliance with type of breaker by limitingcircuit up to 90% .- Explosion and arc are held at very low level in circuit sothat personnel safety is under guaranteed.

Beginning of short-circuits, magnetic releases move theoperating mechanism to OFF position, mechanism movesmoving contact from pos-2 to pos-3. The current whichmoves moving contact from pos-1 to pos-2 is smaller thanexpected short-circuit current does not pass continuouslyin breaker with limiting. (Fig-5)

Fig-3

The view of moving

and fixed contacts

Arc extinguisher

Metalplates

Current

Magneticforce

Magnetic fieldMoving contact

Fixed contact

Current

pos-01

pos-02

pos-03

Fig - 4

The positions of contact

Frame and cover are molded from glass-polyester material

which is mentioned as BMC (Bulk Moulding Compound) in

literature that combines ruggedness , high dielectric strength

and high mechanical resistance in a compact design.

Molded case circuit breakers are designed and tested in

compliance with IEC 947-2 standard and can withstand up

to 160 °C continuously.

Base, frame and cover:

-2006

Fig-6

magnetic field

magnetic force

direction of current

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERSGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS



Precaution against residual current in the circuitbreaker :

Different connection :

• If all of cables are unable to pass through the toroid, anumber of toroids can be connected parallel to the sameearth residual relay. But this type of connection decreasesthe sensitivity of device, so that opening period of deviceincreases.• If the toroid can not be installed to environment of bigmain bars, it can be fixed to neutral-earth bars of transformer.(For balanced loads)

1/5

Protection system of circuit breakers against theearth residual current :

Even the smallest value of earth residual current (> 30 mA)in a electrical circuit can cause extreme danger to start a

fire or against electric shock. That is why an additionalprotection is used against the earth residual current.

Earth residual system can be added to electronic breakerwithout additional equipment. (0.1-1) x In precious protectionis made with this system. In the event of value of earthresidual with In 30 mA, protection against the earth residualis made by toroid transformer and with sensitive relaycombination at the thermal-magnetic breakers and anotherbreaker with electronic. At this system in the beginning,remote opening coil or under voltage coil should be fixedto breaker in order that they can trip against earth residualcurrent. (Figure-8) Fault current of residual current perceptionrelay must be adjusted at the suitable values according totype of protection and defectivity among the another fault

current element. This is described as a 30 mA againstelectrical shocks. And 300-500 mA for fire protection, incompliance with IEC 60947-2 standard.

Installation :All of phases and neutral conductor are passed inside theToroidal transformer. (Earthing cable will not be passedinside the Toroidal transformer.) Seconder cables of Toroidaltransformer will be connected to (S1-S2) terminals of earthresidual current relay and suitable voltage which written onthe relay is given to incoming terminal (A1-A2) of energy.Exactly, remote opening coil or undervoltage relay shouldbe installed to breaker in order that they can trip againstthe earth residual current. If circuit breaker has remoteopening relay, the energy which incoming to opening relay

is made on the normally opening contact of earth residualrelay. (Figure-7)

If circuit breaker has an undervoltage coil, the energy whichis incoming to undervoltage coil is made from upper sideof breaker and on the normally closed contact of earthresidual relay. (Figure-9) Commonly required, theseaccessories are factory installed.

-2006

Fig-8 Protection system with circuit breaker against the earth residual current

Shunt release orundervoltage coil

Residualcurrentrelay

Toroidaltransformer

N

Load

R S T

Fig-7 F1 : Shunt release

Residual

current relay Toroidal

transformer

R S T N

LOAD

S2S1321

A2A1

AC 220V

F1

C1 C2Q1

Circuit

breaker

Residual current protection system with shunt release whichin breaker :

Residual current protection system with undervoltage releasewhich in circuit breaker :

Fig-9

Residualcurrent relay

R S T N

LOAD

S2S1321

A2A1

AC 220V

Toroidaltransformer

F2

D1 D2Q1

U<

Circuit

breaker

F2 : Undervoltage release (UVR)

- All of the cables (phases and neutral) of conductor shouldbe passed inside the toroid transformer. Earth cable shouldnot be passed inside the toroidal transformer.- Diameter of toroidal transformer must be suitable.

PROTECTION SYSTEM OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AGAINST THE EARTH RESIDUAL CURRENTPROTECTION SYSTEM OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AGAINST THE EARTH RESIDUAL CURRENT 11



-2006 1/6

Number of pole

Rated operational voltage - Ue (a.c.) 50-60 Hz

Rated insulation voltage - Ui (a.c.) 50-60 Hz

Rated impulse withstand voltage - Uimp

Testing voltage (1 min) (a.c.) 50-60 Hz

Rated current adjustment range - I1

Short-circuit opening current range-I2

Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity - Icu

(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 220/240 V

(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V

(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 440 V

(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 500 V

(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 690 V

(d.c.) 250 V

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity-Ics415V~

Rated short circuit making capacity-Icm 415V~

Breaking time

Catagory (EN 60947-2) IEC 947-2

Fixed thermal - f ixed magnetic

Adjustable thermal - fixed magnetic

Adjustable thermal - adjustable magnetic

Fixed thermal - adjustable magnetic

Microprocess unit (electronic)

Current limiting

Mechanical life Operation

Electrical life Operation

Dimensions Wideness

Height

Depth

Weight

Min. Connection cross sectionsConnection terminal tightening torque

Notes : Indicated parts are standard productions, Indicated parts are produced upon order.• Calibration is possible for different values according to application.• Icu: O-t-CO (O : Breaking operation, CO : Closed-breaking operation, t : Waiting time).

• Two poles of circuit breakers are connected in series• Ics: O-t-CO-t-CO (O : Breaking operation , CO : Closed-breaking operation , t : Waiting time)• Connection cross section is given according to IEC 60947-1/EN 60947-1. This is 10 mm2,for 40 A and 70 mm2 for 160 A.• F61, F62, F91E, F92E, F101E, F102E, F111E and F112E types of circuit breakers are manufactured as a standard long bar

Technical characteristics oflow voltage circuit breakersIEC 60947-2EN 60947-2

Undervoltage Release

Shunt trip

Auxiliary contact

Motorized operating mechanism

Extended rotary handle

Locking mechanism with key

Extension bar

Terminal cover

Inverser lock

Phase separator

Accessories

Type

3

5

H

DW

8

8

8

A

2

4

Quantity

V

V

kV

V

A

A

(kA rms)

(kA rms)

(kA rms)

(kA rms)

(kA rms)

(kA rms)

(kA rms)

kA peak

ms

mm (W)

mm (H)

mm (D)

kg

mm2

Nm

<7

A

—

—

—

>15.000

3000

40

169

85

0,85

16,25,32,40,50,63,80100,125,160,200,225

1

240

750

8

3.000

Fixed

8xIn

35

12

-

-

-

10

35(240V~)

74(240V~)

2.5,4,6,10,10,16

25,35,50,70,95,95

F01 F02

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

16,25,32,40,50,63,80100,125,160,200,225,250

85

50

32

22

13

22

50

105

<7

A

—

—

—

>15.000

3000

106

165

90.5

2,2

3

415

750

8

4.000

(0,8-1)In

8xIn

2.5,4,6,10,10,16,25

35,50,70,95,95,120

—

F33F31 F32

100

65

40

25

14

22

65

143

65

35

25

18

12

22

35

74

10

2.5,4,6,10,10

16,25,35,50

16,25,32,40,5063,80,100,125

<7

A

—

—

—

>15.000

3000

90

155

64.5

1,3

3

415

750

8

3.000

(0,8-1)In

8xIn

—

—

—

F22F21

100

50

42

30

20

15

25

105

50

25

20

12

8

15

25

52

6

<10

A

—

—

—

>15.000

3000

76

120

75

0,9

16,25,32,40,5063,80,100,125

25

16

10

8

-

15

8

32

2.5,4,6,10,10

16,25,35,50

F11

—

—

—

—

—

—

3

415

750

8

3.000

Fixed

10xIn

6

F10

30

20

12

9

-

20

20

40

F12

16,25,32,40,5063,80,100,125,160

3

415

750

8

3.000

(0,8-1)In

10xIn

35

20

18

10

6

18

20

40

<10

A

—

—

—

>15.000

3000

90

120

76

1

2.5,4,6,10,10

16,25,35,50,706

—

—

—

—

—

—

Rated current - In (40 or 55°C)

65

14

-

-

-

10

65(240V~)

143(240V~)

GENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERSGENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS



-2006 1/7

—

—

—

Notes :• Electromagnetic releases at the electronic circuit breakers: In circuit breakers withelectronic trip , fast acting electro-magnetic release is additionaly provided on each phase.Incase of high short circuit current (>15xIn), the electromagnetic release trips the circuit breakerindependently.(overriding the electronic trip).

Thus circuit breaker clears the fault even if there is malfunction in the electronic trip. This isa great advantage of Federal breakers with electronic trip.• For new types of circuit breakers, accessories can be used by opening the frontcover by the users (Plug-in).

F61

185,240

25

185,240,2(30x5),

2(40x5),40x12

3

415

750

8

4000

(0,8-1)In

(5-8)In

<10

A

—

> 15.000

3000

210

280

108

9,5

300,400,500630,800

40

F82 F83

75

50

30

20

20

—

50

105

100

65

50

42

25

—

35

143

80x15 , 2(80x10),

2(80x15)

3

415

750

8

4000

(0,4-1)In

(2-10)In

<20

A

> 15.000

3000

392

412

250.5

55

1600,2000,2500

85

50

35

30

20

—

50

105

F111E F112E

125

65

50

42

25

—

35

143

6

7

—

—

50

F53F52F51

200,225,250

3,4

415

750

8

4.000

(0,7-1)In

(4-10)In

85

50

35

25

16

22

50

105

<7

A

—

>15.000

3000

105 (140 4p)

256

105.5

4,2 (5,6 4p)

95,95,120

65

35

25

20

14

22

35

74

100

65

50

40

18

22

65

143

25

300,400

3

415

750

8

4000

(0,7-1)In

(5-10)xIn

<10

A

—

> 15.000

3000

140

257

140

5,8

F62

50

25

20

15

10

20

25

52

100

35

28

21

14

25

25

72

F71

300,400,500630,800

185,240,2(30x5),

2(40x5),40x12

3

415

750

8

4.000

(0,8-1)In

(5-10)xIn

42

35

30

25

20

20

27

74

<10

A

—

—

> 15.000

3000

210

270

109

8

40

F92E

1000,1250

40x15 , 2(40x10)

6

3

415

750

8

4000

(0,4-1)In

(2-10)In

<20

A

—

>15.000

3000

210

370

121.8

21

F82E

185,240,2(30x5),

2(40x5),40x12

F83E

3

415

750

8

4000

(0,4-1)In

(2-10)In

<10

A

> 15.000

3000

210

280

108

9,5

75

50

35

30

20

—

50

105

7

300,400,500630,800

100

65

50

42

25

—

35

143

40

F101E

1250,1600

2(40x10),2(40x12)

6

—

3

415

750

8

4000

(0,4-1)In

(2-10)In

<20

A

>15.000

3000

210

370

121.8

27

7

F102E

80

50

40

25

20

—

25

105

100

65

45

35

25

—

35

143

50 50

7

F91E

80

50

35

25

18

—

25

105

100

65

45

35

25

—

35

143

6

GENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERSGENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS 11



-2006 1/8

3 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for Standard Protection

Order CodeType

Medium breaking capacityAdjustingrangeI1 (A)

RatedcurrentIn (A)

High breaking capacity

9AM-TMS43-0016

9AM-TMS43-0020

9AM-TMS43-0025

9AM-TMS43-0032

9AM-TMS43-0040

9AM-TMS43-0050

9AM-TMS43-0063

9AM-TMS43-0080

9AM-TMS43-0100

9AM-TMS43-0125

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

9AB-TMS43-0016

9AB-TMS43-0020

9AB-TMS43-0025

9AB-TMS43-0032

9AB-TMS43-0040

9AB-TMS43-0050

9AB-TMS43-0063

9AB-TMS43-0080

9AB-TMS43-0100

9AB-TMS43-0125

9AB-TMS43-0160

9AB-TMS43-0200

9AB-TMS43-0225

9AB-TMS43-02509AD-TMS43-0200

9AD-TMS43-0225

9AD-TMS43-0250

9AP-TMS43-0300

9AP-TMS43-0400

-

-

-

-

-

9AG-TMS43-0300

9AG-TMS43-0400

9AG-TMS43-0500

9AG-TMS43-06309AG-TMS43-0800

F11

-

-

F32

F52

F62

-

F82

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

10-16

16-20

20-25

25-32

32-40

40-50

50-63

63-80

80-100

100-125

125-160

10-16

16-20

20-25

25-32

32-40

40-50

50-63

63-80

80-100

100-125

10-16

16-20

20-25

25-32

32-40

40-50

50-63

63-80

80-100

100-125

125-160

160-200

180-225

200-250160-200

180-225

200-250

315-400

400-500

240-300

315-400

400-500

500-630

630-800

240-300

315-400

400-500

500-630630-800

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

225

250200

225

250

300

400

300

400

500

630

800

300

400

500

630800

Type

-

-

F22

F33

F53

-

-

F83

Order Code

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

9AA-THS43-0016

9AA-THS43-0020

9AA-THS43-0025

9AA-THS43-0032

9AA-THS43-0040

9AA-THS43-0050

9AA-THS43-0063

9AA-THS43-0080

9AA-THS43-0100

9AA-THS43-0125

9AB-THS43-0016

9AB-THS43-0020

9AB-THS43-0025

9AB-THS43-0032

9AB-THS43-0040

9AB-THS43-0050

9AB-THS43-0063

9AB-THS43-0080

9AB-THS43-0100

9AB-THS43-0125

9AB-THS43-0160

9AB-THS43-0200

9AB-THS43-0225

9AB-THS43-02509AD-THS43-0200

9AD-THS43-0225

9AD-THS43-0250

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

9AG-THS43-0300

9AG-THS43-0400

9AG-THS43-0500

9AG-THS43-06309AG-THS43-0800

Order CodeType

Standard breaking capacity

9AM-TSS43-0016

9AM-TSS43-0020

9AM-TSS43-0025

9AM-TSS43-0032

9AM-TSS43-0040

9AM-TSS43-0050

9AM-TSS43-0063

9AM-TSS43-0080

9AM-TSS43-0100

9AM-TSS43-0125

9AR-TSS43-0016

9AR-TSS43-0020

9AR-TSS43-0025

9AR-TSS43-0032

9AR-TSS43-0040

9AR-TSS43-0050

9AR-TSS43-0063

9AR-TSS43-0080

9AR-TSS43-0100

9AR-TSS43-0125

9AR-TSS43-0160

9AA-TSS43-0016

9AA-TSS43-0020

9AA-TSS43-0025

9AA-TSS43-0032

9AA-TSS43-0040

9AA-TSS43-0050

9AA-TSS43-0063

9AA-TSS43-0080

9AA-TSS43-0100

9AA-TSS43-0125

9AB-TSS43-0016

9AB-TSS43-0020

9AB-TSS43-0025

9AB-TSS43-0032

9AB-TSS43-0040

9AB-TSS43-0050

9AB-TSS43-0063

9AB-TSS43-0080

9AB-TSS43-0100

9AB-TSS43-0125

9AB-TSS43-0160

9AB-TSS43-0200

9AB-TSS43-0225

9AB-TSS43-02509AD-TSS43-0200

9AD-TSS43-0225

9AD-TSS43-0250

9AP-TMS43-0300

9AP-TMS43-0400

9AF-TSS43-0300

9AF-TSS43-0400

9AF-TSS43-0500

9AF-TSS43-0630

9AF-TSS43-0800

-

-

-

--

F10

F12

F21

F31

F51

F61

F71

BreakertypeI2 (A)

160

200

250

320

400

500

630

800

1000

1250

160

200

250

320

400

500

630

800

1000

1250

1600

200

200

200

250

320

400

500

640

800

1000

200

200

200

250

320

400

500

800

800

1000

1280

1600

1800

2000(4-10) In

(4-10) In

(4-10) In

(5-10) In

(5-10) In

(5-8) In

(5-8) In

(5-8) In

(5-8) In

(5-8) In

(5-8) In

(5-8) In

(5-8) In

(5-8) In(5-8) In

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS



-2006 1/9

3 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for Generator Protection

Order CodeType

Medium breaking capacityAdjusting

range

I1 (A)

Rated

current

In

(A)


-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

9AB-TMJ43-0016

9AB-TMJ43-0020

9AB-TMJ43-0025

9AB-TMJ43-0032

9AB-TMJ43-0040

9AB-TMJ43-0050

9AB-TMJ43-0063

9AB-TMJ43-0080

9AB-TMJ43-0100

9AB-TMJ43-0125

9AB-TMJ43-0160

9AB-TMJ43-0200

9AB-TMJ43-0225

9AB-TMJ43-0250

-

F32

10-16

16-20

20-25

25-32

32-40

40-50

50-63

63-80

80-100

100-125

10-16

16-20

20-25

25-32

32-40

40-50

50-63

63-80

80-100

100-125

125-160

160-200

180-225

200-250

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

225

250

Type

F22

F33

Order Code

9AA-THJ43-0016

9AA-THJ43-0020

9AA-THJ43-0025

9AA-THJ43-0032

9AA-THJ43-0040

9AA-THJ43-0050

9AA-THJ43-0063

9AA-THJ43-0080

9AA-THJ43-0100

9AA-THJ43-0125

9AB-THJ43-0016

9AB-THJ43-0020

9AB-THJ43-0025

9AB-THJ43-0032

9AB-THJ43-0040

9AB-THJ43-0050

9AB-THJ43-0063

9AB-THJ43-0080

9AB-THJ43-0100

9AB-THJ43-0125

9AB-THJ43-0160

9AB-THJ43-0200

9AB-THJ43-0225

9AB-THJ43-0250

Order CodeType


9AA-TSJ43-0016

9AA-TSJ43-0020

9AA-TSJ43-0025

9AA-TSJ43-0032

9AA-TSJ43-0040

9AA-TSJ43-0050

9AA-TSJ43-0063

9AA-TSJ43-0080

9AA-TSJ43-0100

9AA-TSJ43-0125

9AB-TSJ43-0016

9AB-TSJ43-0020

9AB-TSJ43-0025

9AB-TSJ43-0032

9AB-TSJ43-0040

9AB-TSJ43-0050

9AB-TSJ43-0063

9AB-TSJ43-0080

9AB-TSJ43-0100

9AB-TSJ43-0125

9AB-TSJ43-0160

9AB-TSJ43-0200

9AB-TSJ43-0225

9AB-TSJ43-0250

F21

F31

Breaker

type

I2 (A)

160

160

160

160

200

250

300

320

400

500

160

160

160

160

200

250

300

320

400

500

640

800

900

1000

3 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for Motor Protection

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

10-16

16-20

20-25

25-32

32-40

40-50

50-63

63-80

80-100

100-125

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

F22

9AA-THM43-0016

9AA-THM43-0020

9AA-THM43-0025

9AA-THM43-0032

9AA-THM43-0040

9AA-THM43-0050

9AA-THM43-0063

9AA-THM43-0080

9AA-THM43-0100

9AA-THM43-0125

9AA-TSM43-0016

9AA-TSM43-0020

9AA-TSM43-0025

9AA-TSM43-0032

9AA-TSM43-0040

9AA-TSM43-0050

9AA-TSM43-0063

9AA-TSM43-0080

9AA-TSM43-0100

9AA-TSM43-0125

F21

200

200

250

320

400

500

630

800

1000

1250

Order CodeType


range

I1 (A)

Rated

current

In

(A)


Type Order CodeOrder CodeType

Standard breaking capacityBreaker

type

I2 (A)

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS 11



-2006 1/10

Note: Circuit breakers can be produced only without thermal adjustment for orders (Only magnetic adjustment).

1 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers

RatedCurrent

In (A)

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

225

Adjustingrange

I1 (A)

10-16

16-20

20-25

25-32

32-40

40-50

50-63

63-80

80-100

100-125

125-160

160-200

180-225

Trippingcurrent ofelectromagneticreleasesI2 (A)

160

160

200

250

320

400

500

800

800

1000

1280

1600

1800


9AB-TSS41-0016

9AB-TSS41-0020

9AB-TSS41-0025

9AB-TSS41-0032

9AB-TSS41-0040

9AB-TSS41-0050

9AB-TSS41-0063

9AB-TSS41-0080

9AB-TSS41-0100

9AB-TSS41-0125

9AB-TSS41-0160

9AB-TSS41-0200

9AB-TSS41-0225


F01 F02

9AB-THS43-0016

9AB-THS43-0020

9AB-THS43-0025

9AB-THS43-0032

9AB-THS43-0040

9AB-THS43-0050

9AB-THS43-0063

9AB-THS43-0080

9AB-THS43-0100

9AB-THS43-0125

9AB-THS43-0160

9AB-THS43-0200

9AB-THS43-0225

3 Pole Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for Motor Protection

9AB-TMM43-0016

9AB-TMM43-0020

9AB-TMM43-0025

9AB-TMM43-0032

9AB-TMM43-0040

9AB-TMM43-0050

9AB-TMM43-0063

9AB-TMM43-0080

9AB-TMM43-0100

9AB-TMM43-0125

9AB-TMM43-0160

9AB-TMM43-0200

9AB-TMM43-0225

9AB-TMM43-0250

F32

110-16

16-20

20-25

25-32

32-40

40-50

50-63

63-80

80-100

100-125

125-160

160-200

180-225

200-250

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

225

250

F33

9AB-THM43-0016

9AB-THM43-0020

9AB-THM43-0025

9AB-THM43-0032

9AB-THM43-0040

9AB-THM43-0050

9AB-THM43-0063

9AB-THM43-0080

9AB-THM43-0100

9AB-THM43-0125

9AB-THM43-0160

9AB-THM43-0200

9AB-THM43-0225

9AB-THM43-0250

9AB-TSM43-0016

9AB-TSM43-0020

9AB-TSM43-0025

9AB-TSM43-0032

9AB-TSM43-0040

9AB-TSM43-0050

9AB-TSM43-0063

9AB-TSM43-0080

9AB-TSM43-0100

9AB-TSM43-0125

9AB-TSM43-0160

9AB-TSM43-0200

9AB-TSM43-0225

9AB-TSM43-0250

F31

200

200

250

320

400

500

630

800

1000

1250

1600

2000

2250

2500

Order CodeType


range

I1 (A)

Rated

current

In

(A)


Type Order CodeOrder CodeType

Standard breaking capacityBreaker

type

I2 (A)

Order CodeType Order CodeType

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS



-2006 1/11

Circuit Breakers can be manufactured as thermal fixed (Only magnetic adjustable) upon request.

Delay time of electromagnetic relays can be ajdustable as t2: 100-150-200-250-300-350-400 ms. upon request.

3 Pole Electronic circuit breakers

RatedCurrent

In (A)

300

400

500

630

800

1000

1250

1250

1600

1600

2000

2500

Adjustingrange

I1 (A)

Trippingcurrent ofelectromagneticreleasesI2 (A)

(2-10) I1

(2-10) I1

(2-10) I1

(2-10) I1


9AG-EMS43-0300

9AG-EMS43-0400

9AG-EMS43-0500

9AG-EMS43-0630

9AG-EMS43-0800

9AG-EMS43-1000

9AG-EMS43-1250

9AI-EMS43-1250

9AI-EMS43-1600

9AG-EMS43-1600

9AG-EMS43-2000

9AG-EMS43-2500


Type Order Code Type Order Code

F82E

F91E

F101E

F111E

120-300

160-400

200-500

250-630

320-800

400-1000

500-1250

500-1250

640-1600

640-1600

800-2000

1000-2500

F83E

F92E

F102E

F112E

9AG-EHS43-0300

9AG-EHS43-0400

9AG-EHS43-0500

9AG-EHS43-0630

9AG-EHS43-0800

9AG-EHS43-1000

9AG-EHS43-1250

9AI-EHS43-1250

9AI-EHS43-1600

9AG-EHS43-1600

9AG-EHS43-2000

9AG-EHS43-2500

Circuit Breaker F series from 16 A to 2500 A.

Thus circuit breaker clears the fault even if malfunctionin the electronic trip.This is great advantage of Federalbreakers with electronic trip.Circuit breakers can manufactured thermal fixed (onlymagnetic adjustable) upon request

Double Protection Unit For Short Circuit CurrentIn circuit breakers with electronic trip, beyond thermalprotection, fast-acting electro-magnetic release is additionallyprovided on each phase.In case of high short circuit current(>15xIn) the electromagnetic release trips the circuit breakerindependently (over riding the electronic trip)

Electromagnetic Releases At The Electronic Circuit Breakers

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS and ORDER CODES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS 11



-2006 1/12

Circuit Breaker selection table for protection of motors with

three phase

(To give direct way to standard squirrel cage motors 400 V,

4 pole)

Motor ratedcurrent

(A)

8,5

11,5

15,5

18,5

20

22,5

30

36

43

52

58

68

72

79

85

98

104

112

117

142

147

169

188

204243

260

273

280

292

333

342

368

408

465

565

580

MotorPower

(kW) (Hp)

5,5

7,5

10

12

13,5

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

54

60

70

75

80

85

100

110

125

136

150175

190

200

205

220

245

250

270

300

340

410

430

Breaker rated current

(A)

16

16

20

20

25

25

32

40

50

63

63

80

80

100

100

100

125

125

125

160

160

200

200

250250

300

300

300

300

400

400

400

500

500

630

630

4

5,5

7,5

9

10

11

15

18,5

22

25

30

33

37

40

45

51

55

59

63

75

80

90

100

110132

140

147

150

160

180

185

200

220

250

300

315

The breakers which are used for

protection of capacitor circuits with

three phase and 400 V. (Ambient

temperature 40°C)

Example :The main circuit breaker

has 2500 A rated current and 65 kA

short-circuit should be connected to

the main distribution panel of 1600

kVA transformer.

Note: Rated current of circuit breaker

for capacitive loading is to be

founded by multiplying with 1,5

coefficient of circuit breaker .

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

250

315

400

500

630

800

1000

1250

1600

2000

2500

58

72

91

115

144

180

231

289

361

455

578

723

910

1156

1445

1805

2312

2912

3600

63

80

100

125

160

200

250

300

400

500

630

800

1000

1250

1600

2000

2500

3000

4000

Power

(kVAr)

5

10

15

20

25

30

40

50

60

80

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

500

550

600

Rated Current

(A)

7.6

15.2

22

29

36

43

58

72

87

115

144

216

288

361

433

505

577

722

793

866

Breaker rated

current (A)

16

25

40

63

80

100

100

125

125

160

200

300

400

500

630

800

800

1000

1250

1250

Capacitor

The breakers which are used at the

low voltage main distribution panels

distribution transformers :

(Medium voltage to 36kV)

Power

(kVAr)

Rated

Current400 V (A)

Breaker rated

current(40 °C) In (A)

Transformer

Note : Breaker types should be suitable for motor protection.

Standards

Ambient temperature

Pollution degree

AltitudeRelative humidity

Fitting position (max)

°C

m

IEC / EN 60947-2/1, VDE 0660-20 and +60III

2.000%50 (40 °C), %90 (20 °C)30°

Technical Characteristics

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CIRCUIT BREAKER SELECTION TABLECIRCUIT BREAKER SELECTION TABLE



VARIATION IN THERMAL ELEMENT SETTING CURRENTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

-2006 1/13

temperature for the breaker or the breaker should beselected in accordance with operating current which is

described in the chart. If the breaker operates over calibratedambient temperature, it trips before rated values.If the ambient temperature is lower than calibrated values,the breaker trips after rated values.

The values in the chart show the maximum operating current,as a function of ambient temperature of the breaker. If

ambient temperatures above the rated temperature, thebreaker will carry less than their continuous current rating.So that rated current should be calibrated according toambient temperature by taking into consideration ambient

Efficiency of the ambient temperature on the ratedcurrent of circuit breaker :

Example :Maximum rated current of the F31 type circuit breaker with 100 A rated current which calibrated to 40 °C is 95 A for an ambienttemperature of 50 °C.

20°C 30°C 40°C 60°C50°CIn(A)

16

20

25

32

4050

63

80

100

125

160

200

200

250

300

400

500

630

800

300

400

500

630

800

1000

1250

1600

2000

2500

3200

4000

5000

Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

Electronic Circuit Breakers

15,2

19,0

23,8

30,4

38,047,5

59,9

76,0

95,0

118,8

152,0

190,0

213,8

237,5

285,0

380,0

475,0

598,5

760,0

300,0

400,0

500,0

630,0

800,0

1000,0

1250,0

1600,0

2000,0

2500,0

3200,0

4000,0

5000,0

14,6

18,2

22,8

29,1

36,445,5

57,3

72,8

91,0

113,8

145,6

182,0

204,8

227,5

273,0

364,0

455,0

573,3

728,0

300,0

400,0

500,0

630,0

800,0

1000,0

1250,0

1600,0

2000,0

2500,0

3200,0

4000,0

5000,0

17,1

21,4

26,7

34,2

42,853,5

67,4

85,6

107,0

133,8

171,2

214,0

240.8

267.5

321.0

428.0

535.0

674.1

856.0

300,0

400,0

500,0

630,0

800,0

1000,0

1250,0

1600,0

2000,0

2500,0

3200,0

4000,0

5000,0

16,6

20,8

26,0

33,3

41,652,0

65,5

83,2

104,0

130,0

166,4

208,0

234,0

260,0

312,0

416,0

520,0

655,2

832,0

300,0

400,0

500,0

630,0

800,0

1000,0

1250,0

1600,0

2000,0

2500,0

3200,0

4000,0

5000,0

16,0

20,0

25,0

32,0

40,050,0

63,0

80,0

100,0

125,0

160,0

200,0

225,0

250,0

300,0

400,0

500,0

630,0

800,0

300,0

400,0

500,0

630,0

800,0

1000,0

1250,0

1600,0

2000,0

2500,0

3200,0

4000,0

5000,0

VARIATION IN THERMAL ELEMENT SETTING CURRENTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 11



-2006 1/14

Selectivity chart :

The selectivity chart may be used to determine the selectivitytable to be used for various transformer side and load sidedevices.

≥ 1,5

I2 = Short circuit tripping current of circuit breaker (A)

Selectivity Limit :

I2 (on transformer side)I2 (on load side )

In definition of selectivity means that; co-ordination ofautomatic over-current protective devices in such a mannerthat a fault appearing at a given point in a network is clearedby the protective device installed immediately upstream ofthe fault, and by that device alone. (Fig-10) For all faultcurrent values, from overloads up to the non-resistive shortcircuit current, full selectivity exists if circuit breaker (A1)opens and A2 remains closed. If the above contition is notsatisfied up to the full short circuit current, there is an partialselectivity.Selectivity contributes to continuity of service, a necessityin many industrial, commercial or institutional installations.

Time selectivity :

Time selectivity is obtained by staggering the operatingtimes of circuit breakers equipped with short time delay tripunits. Selectivity is made by coinciding of C1 and C2 operatingcurves and increasing the C1 breaker’s time adjustmentmore then C2 breaker. Circuit breaker C1 must have anelectrodynamic withstand compatible with the short timewithstand current to which it is subjected during the shorttime delay.Delay (on transformer side) > Delay (on load side).

The spread of the current settings on circuit breakers B1

and B2 is generally proportional to their ratings, giving:IB2 of B2 < IB1 of B1

Restricted selectivity is obtained for overcurrents less thanIB1 of B1. (Fig -11)This selectivity can be significantly improved by the use ofa current limiting circuit breaker for B2. The limiting actionof B2 improves selectivity. Restricted selectivity with aconventional breaker can be increased to full selectivity witha current limiting circuit breaker. In this case B1 does notopen even for currents exceeding its setting IB1, since theenergy is limited by the operation of B2 and remains belowthe no- trip energy of B1In this way full current selectivity isobtained.

Current selectivity :

General :

Using of the selectivity chart :

: Indicates that, combinations providing selectivity. Withinthis zones , there is never any interference between thethermal and magnetic tripping curves of the transformerside and load side circuit breakers.

The current value above which both protective devices opensimultaneously.

Fig-11

Fig-12

Fig-10

A2

A1

B1B2t

IB1IB2 I

only B2 opens B1 and B2 open

B1

B2

Load

C1C2t

I

C1

C2

Load

Only

C2 opens

C1 and

C2 open

Fig-13

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1

.05

.02

.01

.0051 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30x100 A

Current

T i m e

( s n )

1

Current selectivite (Overload protection)

F31100 A

F51250 A

SELECTIVITYSELECTIVITY



-2006 1/15

Transformer

Side In (A)

F21-F22/ F31-F32-F33

StandardProtectionCircuitBreakerF10-F11F12F21-F22F31-F32-F33

MotorProtectionCircuitBreakerF10-F11F12F21-F22F31-F32-F33

GeneratorProtectionCircuitBreakerF10-F11F12F21-F22F31-F32-F33

16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 200 250 300 400 500 630 800

200 250 300 500 640 800 1000 1280 1600 2000 2500 2400 3200 4000 5040 6400

16

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

16

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

16

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

F51-F52-F53 F61-F62/F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E

Example :

If Rated current on transformer side = 100 AUsing of rated current of downstream (on load side) circuit breaker should be ;For standard protection : up to 63 A.For motor protection : up to 40 A.For generator protection : up to 80 A.

Selectivity limit (A) 160

Standard Protection Circuit Breaker

400

Load sideI1 (A)

SELECTIVITYSELECTIVITY 11



-2006 1/16

Load sideI1 (A)

Transformerside In(A)

MotorProtectionCircuitBreaker

F51-F52-F53F61-F62F71F82-F83

200

250

300

400

500

630

800

200

250

300

400500

630

800

200

250

300

400

500

630

800

Standard ProtectionCircuitBreakerF51-F52-F53F61-F62F71F82-F83

GeneratorProtectionCircuitBreakerF51-F52-F53F61-F62F71F82-F83

F51-F52-F53 F61-F62/F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E F91E-F92EF101E-F102E

F111E-F112E

2500 2400 3200 4000 5040 6400 10000 12500 16000 250002000 20000200 250 300 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 25002000

Selectivity limit (A)

Load sideI1 (A)

Transformerside In(A)

Motor ProtectionCircuit BreakerF51-F52-F53F61-F62F71F82-F83F82E-F83E

200

250

300

400

500

630

800

200250

300

400

500

630

800

200

250

300

400

500

630

800

Standard ProtectionCircuit BreakerF51-F52-F53F61-F62F71F82-F83F82E-F83E

Generator ProtectionCircuit BreakerF51-F52-F53F61-F62F71F82-F83

F82E-F83E

F51 F61-F62/F71/F82-F83 F91E-F92EF101E-F102E

F112E

3000 3600 4800 6000 7560 9600 10000 12500 16000 250002400 20000

200 250 300 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 25002000

Selectivity limit (A)

Motor protection circuit breakers

Standard protection circuit breakers

SELECTIVITYSELECTIVITY



1/17-2006

Detailed determination at any one point :

Part of

installation

Resistance

(mΩ)

Reactances

(mΩ)

network

side

transformer

R1=Z1 x cosϕ x 10-3

cosϕ =0.15X1=Z1 x sinϕ x 10-3

sinϕ =0.98

R2= Pc x U2

S2x10-3

Pc=cupper loss (W)S=apparent power oftransformer (kVA)

k=56 (Cu) or 36 (AI)

k= m

Ωmm2

bars

circuit breaker R4 negligible

cables (1)

X4 negligible

X2= √Z22-R2

2

Z2= Usc100

x U2

S

X3=0.07L (3 phase cables)

X3=0.15L (Mono phase cables)

L : Length of cable (m)

S : section of cable (mm2

)

X3=0.15 L

Part of

installation

Resistance

(mΩ)

Reactances

(mΩ)

Diagram

network side

P1=500 MVAR1= 4002

500x 0.15x10-3

R1=0.05 mΩ

transformerS=800 kVAUsc=%6U=400 VPc=9700 W

R2= 9700x4002x10-3

8002

R2=2.42 mΩ

Connection cablestransformers tocircuit breaker2 ( 3x240 ) mm2

per phase

L=4 m

R3= 4x103

56x240x2

R3=0.14 mΩ

Circuit breaker R4=0

Connection CBto outgoingline no 2 (Al)10x80 mm2

per phaseL=3 m

R5= 3x103

36x800

R5=0.10 mΩ

Circuit breakers R6=0

Connection(cables)main LVswitcboard( 3x185 mm2 )

copper per phaseL= 70 m

R7= 70x103

56x185

R7=6.75 mΩ

X1= 4002

500x 0.98 x10-3

X1=0.31 mΩ

X2= 6100

X2=11.75 mΩ

4002

800x - (2.42)2

X3= 42

X3=0.14 mΩ

0.07 x

X4=0

X5=0.15 x 3

X5=0.45 mΩ

X6=0

X7=0.07 x 70

X7=4.9 mΩ

Calculation of short - circuit currents (kA)

Resistances(mΩ)

M1

M2

M3

Rt1=R1+R2+R3

Rt1=2.61

Rt2=Rt1+R4+R5

Rt2=2.71

Rt3=Rt2+R6+R7Rt3=9.46

Xt1=X1+X2+X3

Xt1=12.2

Xt2=Xt1+X4+X5

Xt2=12.65

Xt3=Xt2+X6+X7Xt3=17.55

Reactances(mΩ)

√3400

√(2.612+12.22)=18.52kA

√3400

√(2.712+12.652)=17.86kA

√3 400√(9.462+17.552) =11.58kA

2

(1) If there are several cables in parallel per phase, divide the resistanceand reactance of one cable by the number of cables.

Z1= U2

P1(network impedance of interconnect system)

Z2= Impedance of transformer

Short circuit current(kA)

R3= Lk.S

R3= Lk.S

L : Length of bar (m)

S : Section of bar (mm2)k=56 (Cu) or 36 (AI)

k= m Ωmm2

x103

x103

Table showing the maximum short circuit current of a distribution transformer during under load conductions :

Sn : Rated power of transformer (kVA)In : Rated current of transformer (A)

Un : Output voltage between phases of the transformerunder onloaded condition (V)Usc : Short circuit voltage of transformer (%)Isc : Maximum short circuit current of secondary side ofthe transformer with 3 phase (A).

Example :

Rated power of transformer = 1250 kVA ( Un: 400 V, Usc: %6)Isc : ?

Isc = S x 100

1,73 x Un x UscIsc=

In x 100 Usc

or

Isc= 630 x 100 = 20207 A.

1,73 x 400 x 6

Short circuit current determination at any one point of line :

Rt: Total resistance (mΩ)Xt: Total reactance (mΩ)

Isc=Un

√3. √Rt2 + Xt2(kA)

1283

1603

2020

2566

3207

4009

5132

6415

8019

10103

12830

16038

20207

19245

24057

30071

38491

48113

60142

Short circuitcurrent for3 phase

Isc (rms A)

Short circuitvoltageUsc (%)

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

6

6

6

6

6

6

RatedcurrentIn (A)

58

72

91

115

144

180

231

289

361

455

578

723

910

1156

1445

1805

2312

2900

3600

TransformerpowerSn (kVA)

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

250

315

400

500

630

800

1000

1250

1600

2000

2500

M1

mainswitcboard

1 2 3

M2

M3secondaryswitchboard

DETERMINATION OF SHORT - CIRCUIT CURRENTDETERMINATION OF SHORT - CIRCUIT CURRENT 11



Isc=20 kA

Isc=?

70 m.

95 mm2 Cu

Example :In the 380 V switchboard, choose on the line correspondingto cable cross-section Cu area : 95mm2 the nearest lowervalue to the cable length: 67m. The crossing of this column

with the line which corresponds to the nearest higher valueof the network short circuit current :22kA, gives the requiredshort circuit current value :11 kA.

415 V380 V

14

14

13

13

13

13

13

13

12

12

11

11

9

7

5

4

3

—

2

3

4

7

11

18

25

35

49

67

84

91

108

136

168

10

10

10

10

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

7

6

5

4

3

2

3

4

6

10

16

25

35

50

70

95

120

130

154

192

240

7

7

7

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

5

4

3

3

—

4

6

9

15

24

38

53

75

105

143

180

195

231

283

360

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

3

5

8

12

20

32

50

70

100

140

190

240

260

308

284

480

IscNetwork

(kA)

cable(mm2)Cu

1,5

2,5

4

6

10

16

25

35

50

70

95

120

150

185

240

300

100

90

80

70

60

50

45

40

35

30

25

22

15

10

7

5

4

AI

—

—

—

1

1

2

3

4

5

7

10

12

13

15

19

24

65

62

58

52

47

41

38

35

31

27

23

21

14

10

7

5

4

—

—

1

—

2

—

4

5

8

11

14

18

20

23

28

36

51

49

47

44

40

36

34

32

28

25

22

20

14

10

7

5

4

—

1

—

—

—

3

5

7

10

14

19

24

26

30

38

48

42

41

39

37

35

32

30

28

26

23

20

19

13

9

7

5

4

1

—

—

2

3

5

8

11

15

21

29

36

39

46

57

72

30

29

29

28

27

25

24

23

21

20

18

18

12

9

6

5

4

—

—

2

3

5

8

13

18

25

35

48

60

65

77

96

120

19

19

18

18

18

17

17

16

16

15

14

13

11

8

6

5

4

Length of cable (m)

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

2

2

3

5

8

13

20

32

50

70

120

151

190

240

260

308

384

480

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

4

3

2

2

4

6

9

15

24

38

53

89

113

143

180

195

231

288

360

—

3

4

6

10

16

25

35

60

75

95

120

130

154

192

240

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

7

7

7

6

6

4

3

3

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

10

10

10

10

8

7

5

4

3

1

2

3

4

7

11

17

24

42

53

66

84

91

107

134

168

20

20

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

12

12

10

8

6

4

3

—

1

2

3

5

8

13

18

30

38

48

60

65

77

96

120

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

20

20

20

17

12

10

6

4

4

—

—

1

2

3

5

8

11

18

23

29

36

39

46

57

72

40

35

35

35

35

30

30

30

25

25

20

20

15

10

6

5

4

—

—

—

1

2

3

5

7

12

15

19

24

26

30

38

48

cable(mm2)Cu

IscNetwork

(kA)100

90

80

70

60

50

45

40

35

30

25

22

15

10

7

5

4

1,5

2,5

4

6

10

16

25

35

50

70

95

120

150

185

240

300

45

45

45

40

40

35

35

30

30

25

25

22

15

10

7

5

4

—

—

—

—

—

2

4

5

9

11

14

18

19

23

28

36

AI Length of cable (m)

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

5

8

12

19

30

48

75

105

179

226

285

360

391

462

576

720

2,5

4

6

10

16

25

35

50

70

120

150

185

240

300

IscShort circuit current

on load side (kA)

IscShort circuit current

on load side (kA)

2,5

4

6

10

16

25

35

50

70

120

150

185

240

300

Determination of short - circuit current at a any point:The tables below show us the evolution of the short circuit current at a point in the network when the short circuitcurrent network, constution and length of the cable are known.

1/18 -2006

DETERMINATION OF SHORT - CIRCUIT CURRENTDETERMINATION OF SHORT - CIRCUIT CURRENT



ACCESSORIES FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKERSACCESSORIES FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1/19-2006

Pic-2 Electronic Ground Fault Relay

Pic-3 Toroidal transformer

Pic-4 Auxiliary Contact Block

F31-F32

F33

F51-F52

F53

F71 F92EAuxiliary Contact Block :

The auxiliary contact block is mechanically actuated bycircuit breakers operating mechanism. It is used for remotesignalling and electrical interlocking purposes. One contactblock has 1NO+1NC contacts. Auxiliary contact blocks canbe retrofitted by customer without opening breaker frontcover in model F21 and F83E. For all other models, it mustbe factory fitted and cannot be fitted on site.NO: Normally opening contactNC: Normally closing contactPlease order according to following table.

Toroidal transformer :

All the phases and neutral lines are passed throught thetorodial transformers. If a current exists in the system, the

equvalent of input and output currents will be changed. So,a difference current passes through the toroidal winding.And this difference current is eveluated by the electronic

ground fault relay.

Type

Ground current setting

Order code

Trip time setting

Power supply

Output relay

Reset

FGR-05R

30-500 mA

8AT-N0000-0500

0,1 - 2,0 sn

110 / 220 V AC 50/60 Hz

3 A, 250 V AC

Manual / Electrical (Remote)

FGR-10R

100-1000 mA

8AT-N0000-1000

FGR-25R

200-2500 mA

8AT-N0000-2500

Electronic Ground Fault Relays :

When a current is perceived from the sign which is comingfrom the torodial transformer, electronic ground fault relayprovides to open the circuit breaker with the low voltage coil.

Toroidal Diameter (mm) Ø

60 mm

110 mm

160 mm

210 mm

Order Codes

8AT-R0000-0060

8AT-R0000-0110

8AT-R0000-0160

8AT-R0000-0210

1 1

1 1

1 1

1 1

1 1

2 2

1 1

2 2

1 1

2 2

1 1

2 2

1 1

2 2

Contact PositionNO NC

RatedVoltage

250 V~

250 V~

250 V~

400 V~

400 V~

400 V~

400 V~

400 V~

400 V~

400 V~

400 V~

400 V~

400 V~

400 V~

RatedCurrent

2 A

2 A

2 A

4 A

4 A

4 A

4 A

4 A

4 A

4 A

4 A

4 A

4 A

4 A

Type

F31-F32-F33

F71

F82-F83/F82E-F83E

F92E

F101E-F102E

Order Codes

8AA-A0011-0000

8AB-A0011-0000

8AD-A0011-0000

8AP-A0011-0000

8AF-A0011-0000

8AF-A0022-0000

8AG-A0011-0000

8AG-A0022-0000

8AH-A0011-0000

8AH-A0022-0000

8AI-A0011-0000

8AI-A0022-0000

8AK-A0011-0000

8AK-A0022-0000

F21-F22

F51-F52-F53

“–” DC, “~” AC, “ ” DC-AC

F61-F62

F111E-F112E

11




-2006 1/20

Shunt Trip Release :

The shunt trip release provides remote control tripping of the

circuit breaker. It consists of an intermittent rated solenoid. When

the breaker is in closed position (ON), if voltage applies to openingrelay, breaker comes to trip position. According to standardization,it

is guaranteed that shunt releases operate between 70 % -110%

of the rated voltage. The tripping device is energized by AC or

DC voltage which is shown on the table.

8AF-BA000-0110

8AF-BA000-0220

8AF-BA000-0380

8AF-BD000-0024

8AF-BD000-0048

8AF-BD000-0110

8AF-BD000-0220

8AK-BA000-0110

8AK-BA000-0220

8AK-BA000-0380

8AK-BD000-0024

8AK-BD000-0048

8AK-BD000-0110

8AK-BD000-0220

8AG-BA000-0110

8AG-BA000-0220

8AG-BA000-0380

8AG-BD000-0024

8AG-BD000-0048

8AG-BD000-0110

8AG-BD000-0220

8AB-BA000-0110

8AB-BA000-0220

8AB-BA000-0380

8AB-BD000-0024

8AB-BD000-0048

8AB-BD000-0110

8AB-BD000-0220

Order Codes :

Operatingvoltage

8AA-BA000-0110

8AA-BA000-0220

8AA-BA000-0380

8AA-BD000-0024

8AA-BD000-0048

8AA-BD000-0110

8AA-BD000-0220

8AH-BA000-0110

8AH-BA000-0220

8AH-BA000-0380

8AH-BD000-0024

8AH-BD000-0048

8AH-BD000-0110

8AH-BD000-0220

8AD-BA000-0110

8AD-BA000-0220

8AD-BA000-0380

8AD-BD000-0024

8AD-BD000-0048

8AD-BD000-0110

8AD-BD000-0220

Pic-6 Undervoltage Release

Pic-5 Shunt Trip Release

F31-F32-F33 F51-F52-F53 F71

110 V ~

220 V ~

380 V ~

24 V –

48 V –

110 V –

220 V –

F21-F22 F31-F32-F33 F51-F52-F53 F71 F82-F83F82E-F83E

F92E F111E-F112E

Undervoltage Release:The function of undervoltage release is opening of the circuit

breaker if energy breaks or voltage falls below under the operating

voltage of 70%Voltage should be equal or above from 85% of

operating voltage value circuit breaker has not restored for

undervoltage release is under the energise continuously.

Note : Circuit breaker with built-in under voltage release can’t be switched on, if there is no supply voltage.

< 154 V

< 266 V

< 154 V

< 266 V< 154 V

< 266 V

< 154 V

< 275 V

< 154 V

< 275 V

< 154 V

< 275 V

< 154 V

< 275 V

< 154 V

< 275 V

< 154 V

< 275 V

> 187 V~

> 323 V~

> 187 V~

> 323 V~> 187 V~

> 323 V~

> 187 V~

> 323 V~

> 187 V~

> 323 V~

> 187 V~

> 323 V~

> 187 V~

> 323 V~

> 187 V~

> 323 V~

> 187 V~

> 323 V~

220 V~

380 V~

220 V~

380 V~220 V~

380 V~

220 V~

380 V~

220 V~

380 V~

220 V~

380 V~

220 V~

380 V~

220 V~

380 V~

220 V~

380 V~

8AA-CA000-0220

8AA-CA000-0380

8AB-CA000-0220

8AB-CA000-03808AD-CA000-0220

8AD-CA000-0380

8AP-CA000-0220

8AP-CA000-0380

8AF-CA000-0220

8AF-CA000-0380

8AG-CA000-0220

8AG-CA000-0380

8AH-CA000-0220

8AH-CA000-0380

8AI-CA000-0220

8AI-CA000-0380

8AK-CA000-0220

8AK-CA000-0380

F21-F22

F31-F32-F33

F51-F52-F53

F61-F62

F71

F82-F83/F82E-F83E

F91E-F92E

F101E-F102E

F111E-F112E

Trip voltageOperating voltageRated voltageType Order codes



ACCESSORIES FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

-2006 1/21

ACCESSORIES FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Motor operating mechanism :

The function of the motor control mechanism is to provide

complete remote operating by opening and closing of a circuit

breaker. Beside the handle mechanism on the breaker is devices

F61/F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E/F91E-F92EMotor operating mechanism

Technical specification :

Order Code

Rated voltage

Power

Opening time

Closed time

8AF-DA000-0220

220 V AC *

100 W

4 s

3.5 s

Extended Rotary Handle :They are used to external manual operation when circuit breakeris installed inside the switch board.

Order Code

8AB-G000-0000

8AD-G000-0000

8AF-G000-0000

8AG-G000-0000

F31-F32-F33

F51-F52-F53

F82-F83/F82E-F83E

F91E-F92E

Type

Lock mechanisms prevent the breaker to opening and closed at the trip position by switching mechanically. So breakerssupply service environment under the security by preventinguse by unauthorised personnel.

Lock Mechanism with Key :

Order Code

8AM-E0000-0000

8AA-E0000-0000

8AB-E0000-0000

8AD-E000-00008AF-E0000-0000

8AG-E0000-0000

8AH-E0000-0000

F10-F11/F12

F21-F22

F31-F32-F33

F51-F52-F53F71

F82-F83/F82E-F83E

F91E-F92E

Type

For dimensions inspect page 34, for circuit diagram inspect page 27.

* There can be different operating voltages (AC-DC) for orders.

F101E-F102E/F111E-F112E Motor operating mechanismTechnical specification :

Order Code

Rated voltage

Power

Opening time

Closed time

8AK-DA000-0220

220 V AC *

500 W

1.5 s

1.5 s

F31-F32-F33/F51-F52-F53 Motor operating mechanism :

Technical specification :

Order Code

Rated voltage

Power

Opening time

Closed time

8AD-DA000-0220

220 V AC *

100 W

1 s

1 s Pic-7F31-F32-F33/F51-F52-F53 Motor operating mechanism

F21-F22 F71

Pic-11Lock Mechanism with Key

Pic-10F31-F32-F33 Extended Rotary Handle

Pic-8F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E/F92E Motor operating mechanism

that allow an operator to opening and closing as a

mechanically of circuit breaker. Motor operating mechanism

is installed to upper side of cover of the breaker. Motor

operating mechanism has mechanical locking mechanism.

Pic-9F111E-F112E Motor operating mechanism

11




-2006 1/22

Extension Bars (EB) :Extension bars are used for easily and reliable connections of cable or bar with breakers terminals.

Fig-14

Connection terminals: Screw head or allian head can be manufactured upon request.

Quantity

of cable

1

1

1

1

Cross section

of cable (mm2)

2.5...50

2,5...95

2,5...95

95...120

Diameter of

cable Ø (mm)

6

12

12

13

Squeeze

force (Nm)

6

10

6

25

Type of

screw

Screw

Allian

Screw

Allian

Quantity

3

3

3

3

Type

F10-F11/F12

F21-F22/F31-F32-F33

F21-F22/F31-F32-F33

F51-F52-F53

Terminal Cover :

The cover supplies security insulation against touching with hand to the part of terminal(bar or cable). Cover isolates terminal by passing to channel between the poles. Sointerference by unauthorised personnel is prevented. (Pic-12)

Pic-12 Terminal protection cover

Pic-13 Connection terminals

F10...F112E

Order Code

8AM-F0000-0000

8AR-F0000-0000

8AA-F0000-0000

8AB-F0000-0000

8AD-F0000-0000

8AP-F0000-0000

F10-F11

F12

F21-F22

F31-F32-F33

F51-F52-F53

F61-F62

Type

Note: Connection terminal of F31-F32-F33 type circuit breaker can be manufactured as allian or screw head upon request.

Order Code

8AF-F0000-0000

8AG-F0000-0000

8AH-F0000-0000

8AI-F0000-0000

8AK-F0000-0000

F71

F82-F83/F82E-F83E

F91E-F92E

F101E-F102E

F111E-F112E

Type

F71

F82-F83

F82E-F83E

F31-F32-F33

F51-F52-F53

8AM-H1000-0125

8AA-H2000-0100

8AB-H2000-0125

8AD-H2001-0250

8AE-H2000-0300

8AF-H2000-0300

8AF-H3000-0500

8AG-H5000-0630

8AG-H7000-0800

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

16 A - 125 A

16 A - 125 A

125 - 160 A

200 A - 250 A

250 A - 400 A

300 A

400 A - 500 A

630 A

800 A

10

10

10

25

25

40

40

40

40

M8

M8

M8

M12

M10

M10

M10

M10

M10

3

3

5

5

8

5

6

8

12

14

18

18

25

38

40

40

40

40

36

16

35

35

42

31

31

31

31

F10-F11/F12

F61-F62

F21-F22

F21-F22/F31-F32-F33 F61-F62F51-F52-F53 F71/F82/F82E-F83E

Ø

L

N

S Phase R,T Phase

4 3

. 5

10.5

2 3

. 5

NØ

L

S Phase R,T Phase

L 2 1

S Phase R,T Phase

N

L

Ø

2 9

1 9

Ø

4 2

1 3

. 5

N

L

S Phase R,T Phase

N

L

Ø

9

R, S, T Phase

F10-F11/F12

F10-F11/F12

Screw head Allian head

F51-F52-F53

Allian headStar head

F21-F22 / F31-F32-F33 F61-F62

Allian head

Type

Order codes

Quantity

(piece)

Rated

current (A)

Squeeze force

(Nm)

Screw

dimension (Ø)

Thickness

P (mm)

Width

N (mm)

Length

L (mm)



AUTOMATIC INVERSER SYSTEMAUTOMATIC INVERSER SYSTEM

Building of a Network-Generator automation namely

automatic inverser system is very easy nd important. Because

if a fault occurs it causes in the system that, network and

generator are in the system at the same time and occur a

short-circuit.

-2006 1/23

Generator is very important for the systems that meet energy

breaking very often or breaking energy cause of big harmful.

Even generator is used, switch on generator may be take

minutes by authorized personnel manually. Generator which

is switched on manually, switch off after the system energize

and then feeding the system from network, switch of network

switch on. This cause time and work loss. Solution of this

problem is switch on generator during the breaking of energize

and switch off generator after the system energize by network-

generator automation.

Network-Generator Inverter Relay

It is used for automatic passing between network generator in

the system that two circuit breaker is used for inverser purpose.

On the screen, state of line, feeding, swich can be watched.

Connection of alarm and shunt trip release can be provided

with fault contact.

Output Contacts : 250V AC, 10A

Feeding Voltage : 12V AC

Input Voltage : 220 V AC

Order Code : 9H5-D0000-0000

Dimensions : 96x96 mmPic-14

Fig-16: Connection diagram of F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E/F91E-F92E/F101E-F102E/F111E-F112E type c ircuit breakerwith motor mechanism for inverser automation system.

3

2

1

0

4

3

b2 OFF

b3 ON4

33

2

1

0

4

3

b2 OFF

b3 ON4

3

Fig-15: Connection diagram of F31-F32-F33/F51-F52-F53 type circuit breaker with motor mechanism for inverser automation system.

AuxiliaryContact

AuxiliaryContact

MOTOR ofGENERATOR

BREAKER

MOTOR ofNETWORKBREAKER

5

4

3

2

1

0

4321

2143

K11 2

K21 2

K14

3K2

4

3

A1A2

K1

A1A2

K2

b1ON

b2OFF

5

4

3

2

1

0Neutral

Phase

4 3 2 1

2 1 4 3

K1 12

K212

K14

3K2

4

3

A1 A2

K1

A1 A2

K2

b1ON

b2OFF

Generator panel connector no. 40


Network-GeneratorInverter Relay

Neutral

12V

Alarm Output

Phase

Neutral

Phase


Generator panel connector no. 39Neutral

12V

MOTOR ofNETWORKBREAKERAlarm Output

Phase

Phase

Neutral

Phase

Neutral

Network-GeneratorInverter Relay

AuxiliaryContact

MOTOR ofGENERATOR

BREAKER

1314

AuxiliaryContact

13 1 4

1314 13 14

Network-Generator Automation (Inverser System)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13

11



ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM of MOTOR OPERATING MECHANISM

-2006 1/24

Motor control mechanism for F111E-F112E type circuit breakers

Fig-19

0 1 2 3

4 4

33b2OFF

b3ON

Motor operating mechanism for F31-F32-F33/F51-F52-F53 type circuit breakers

Fig-17

K1 K2

S2

4

S1

3

21

K1 K2 K1 K2

ON b1Closing

2A

5

KD

220V ~

( )

R

A2

A1

A2

A1

3

4

0

1

OFF b2Opening

1

2

1

2

3

4

1

2

1

2

3

4

3

4

13

14

13

14

21

22

V

2 3 4

NEUTRAL

Terminal connection diagramK1

Openingcontactor

1

3

1

3

5

13

2

4

6

14

K2

Closingcontactor

2

4

1

3

5

13

2

4

6

14

OFFOpening

b2

2AON

Closing

b31 2 3

3

4

3

4

K1 K2b0OFF

Opening

K2K1

R 5 L 6

0

220V ~

R

51 2 3 4 6

K2

K1

S1

K1

K2

S2

b1ON

Closing

S3

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

3

4

21

22

21

22

21

22

21

22

13

14

A1

A2

A1

A2

K2

3

6

1

3

5

21

2

4

6

222

K1

1

5

1

3

5

21

2

4

6

224

Fig-18

Motor operating mechanism for F71/F82-F83/F82E-F83E/F91E-F92E type circuit breakers

0 1 2 3

4 4

33b2OFF

b3ON

Neutral Phase

2A

342

OFFb2

ShuntTrip

ONb3

ShuntTrip

34

K2K1 34

12

K2K1 1

2

13

14

S2

KD

V K1

A1

A2

K2A1

A2

0

21

22S1

220V ~

R

343

34

34

1

Opening Closingb0

NEUTRAL

b1

K2

Closingcontactor

2

4

1

3

5

13

2

4

6

14

K1

Openingcontactor

1

3

1

3

5

13

2

4

6

14

13

14

0 1 2 3 4 5

Neutral Phase

4

32

1

2

14

3

K11

2K2

1

2K1

4

3K2

4

3

A1

A2

K1 A1

A2

K2b1ON

b2OFF

: Terminalsb1 : Opening button (Used by the authorizhed person)b2 : Closed button

S1 : Motor mechanism switch ing limitS2 : Electrical and mechanical locking switch against the breaker closedK1 : Opening contactorK2 : Closed contactorKD : Bridge diotV : Varistor (250 V AC)

: Motor mechanism limit: Users connections

: Terminalsb0 : Opening buttonb1 : Closing buttonb2 : Shunt trip OFF button (Used by the authorizhed person)b3 : Shunt trip ON button (Used by the authorizhed person)S1 : Limiting switchS2 : Electrical and Mechanical locking switchK1 : Opening contactor (Auxiliary contactor)K2 : Closing contactor (Auxiliary contactor)KD : Bridge diotV : Varistor (250 V AC)


ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM of MOTOR OPERATING MECHANISM

: Terminalsb0 : Opening button

b1 : Closing buttonb2 : Shunt trip OFF button (Used by the authorizhed person)b3 : Shunt trip ON button (Used by the authorizhed person)S1 : Under limiting switchS2 : Upper limiting sw itchS3 : Electrical and Mechanical locking switchK1 : Opening contactor (FC-09D01)K2 : Closing contactor (FC-09D01)R : Motor end which will move the circuit breaker’s operating handle forward.L : Motor end which will move the circuit breaker’s operating handle backward.


Neutral Phase

Terminal connection diagram

Terminal connection diagramClosingcontactor

Openingcontactor

NEUTRAL



TIME CURRENT CURVES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS

-2006 1/25

TIME CURRENT CURVES of CIRCUIT BREAKERS

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1

.05

.02

.01

.0051 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30xIn

a

40 °C

±%20

b

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1

.05

.02

.01

.0051 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30xIn

c

40 °C

±%20

Fig-20xIn Current

T i m e

( s e c . )

F01-F02/F10-F11/F12/F21-F22/F31-F32-F33

Thermal magnetic type circuit breaker

Fig-21xIn Current

T i m e

( s e c . )

F51-F52-F53/F61-F62/F71Thermal magnetic type circuit breaker

F82E-F83E/F91E-F92E/F101E-F102E/F111E-F112E

Electronic type circuit breaker

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1

.05

.02

.01

.0051 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30xIn

±%20

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1

.05

.02

.01

.0051 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30xIn

40 °C

±%20

Fig-22

xIn Current

F82-F83

Thermal magnetic type circuit breaker

T i m e

( s e c . )

T i m e

( s e c . )

xIn Current

Fig-23

a: F01-F02 / F21-F22 / F31-F32-F33b: F10-F11 / F12

d

c: F51-F52-F53d: F61-F62-F71

11



DIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS

F01 - F02 Type :

-2006 1/26


40

27

7 1

1 6 9

3 4

6 4

8287

108.5

30

Ø5

1 5 2

Installation holes dimensions

Installation screw dimension : M4x60

1 6 9

27

7 1

Panel front section

F10 - F11 Type :

a) Terminal coverb) Phase separator

2 9 . 5 4

0

1 7 1

1 2 0

5 2

2 5 . 5

67

69.5

75

90

1 7 1

76

ab

1 2 0

1 0 0

26.5

1425 25

76

b

5 2

6 9

2 0

1425 25

R 8

Without terminal cover With terminal cover




-2006 1/27


F12 Type :

2 9 .

5 4 3

30

6 9 .

5

2 6 . 5

15 30

R7

a)Trip buttonb) Phase separatorc) Terminal coverd) Thermal adjustment knob

30

1 2 0

1 0 0

5 1

90

15 30 30

b

a

90

1 7 1

c

1 7 0

5 1

2 5 .

5

68

70.5

77

90

b

d

With terminal cover

F21 - F22 Type :

a) Trip button

b) Thermal adjustment knobc) Extention bard) Phase separatore) Terminal cover Installation screw dimension: M4X60

22

19.5

58

74

79

93

2 6 3

. 3

26.5

c

4 5

. 5

37.5

93

1 5 5

. 7

8 8

. 5

3 3

. 4

a

b

d

18

2 5

e

1 7

6

90.7 65.5

1 8 3

3

30

6 4

17

R 7. 5

89

R 1

91.5

93.5

9 0

1 2 0

1 4 0

102.5

64.5

Panel Mounting Frame

With terminal cover

Ø 5

1 3 2

30

Installation holesdimensions

11




F51 - F52 - F53 Type :

a) Trip buttonb) Thermal adjustment knob

c) Magnetic adjustment knobd) Extention bare) Phase separatorf) Terminal cover

With terminal cover

3 2 7

25

d

a

bc

2 5 6

105 (3 poles)

40.75

1 1 0

e

7 5

7 0

29.5

4 8 .

3

105.5113.5

135.15

28.5

3 8 3

1 1 0

R10.75

4 1 .

2 5

33.75

105 (3 poles)

3 4

105 (3 poles)

2 6 1

105.5

f

1 0 4 . 5


118

80

107

109

1 6 2

1 1 2

1 4 2

R 3


25

140 (4 poles)

140 (4 poles)

140 (4 poles)

35

2 3 0

Ø6


1/28 -2006


F31 - F32 - F33 Type :

a) Trip buttonb) Thermal adjustment knobc) Extention bard) Phase separatore) Terminal cover

With terminal cover


e

106

2 4 .

2 5

115.2

90.5

1 6 5

3 0

106

34

R 10

8 9

35

1 4 6

. 5

Ø5

Installation holesdimensions

1 5 2

118

80

107.5

109

1 0 2

1 3 2

R 3


a

b

c

d

18

1 6 5

41.5

101

1 0 0

3

6

2 3 5

18

4 4

14

115.2

90.5

1 2 0 .

5

3 1 0

21

98.5

1 0 0




-2006 1/29

With terminal cover

F71 Type :

a)Trip buttonb) Thermal magnetic adjustment switch

c) Extention bard) Phase separatore) Terminal coverf ) Handle Extension

F61 - F62 Type :

a)Trip buttonb) Thermal adjustment knobc) Magnetic adjustment knobd) Extention bare) Terminal coverf ) Handle Extension

3 6

1 0 9

60

50

Handle Extension

80

1 1 0

2 7 0

195.5

3 3 9

50 40

106.5

113

240

210

3 2

2 7 5

109

a

b

cd

f

e

Ø6

70

2 3 6

3 9 5

70

3 1

35 70

1 0 7

. 5 R25

210

15.5

123.5

148

7 4

7

4

105

1 1 0

With terminal cover



3 6

1 0 9

60

50

Handle Extension



38

3 4 0

2 5 6

40

5 5 . 6

1 1 0

6 9

7 9

140

43 36

1 1 0

103

115

241

2 6 1

4 1 .

2 5

142 103

142

27.7 43.3 43.3 27.7

R13.5

5 8 .

5

1 0 0 . 5

140

44.5

2 5 6

1 9 4

Ø 9

118

80

107

109

1 6 2

1 1 2

1 4 2

R 3


a

c

d

b

e

f


11



DIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERSDIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS 11

-2006 1/31

F101E - F102E Type :

a)Trip buttonb) Thermal magnetic adjustment switchc) Extention bar

d) Phase separatore) Terminal coverf ) Handle Extension Installation screw dimension : M6x50

F111E - F112E Type :

80

5 8

1 5 3

Ø22.5

a)Trip buttonb) Thermal magnetic adjustment switchc) Extention bard) Phase separatore) Terminal coverf ) Handle Extension

304

a

4 1 2

6 3 4

1 7 5

b

c

7676

1 1 2

1 2 5

1

2 7

11565

265

438

250.5

f

44.5

54

1 7

5

2 8

4

250.5

4

1 7

6 6 . 5

392

e

1 6 5 .

5

342

With terminal cover

2 2 8

3 8 6

367.5

Ø11



Handle Extension

R 3

135

90

117

2 3 5

2 0 7

1 7 7

Pano MontajÇerçevesi

With terminal cover

5 7 0

3 7 1

105

1 3 9

1 0 0

4 7 7

1 1 0

45 25

3 2

1 5

40151

170

215

22

1 5 2

3 9 4

1 1

5 1

297210

3 3 8

70

21050

60

70

1 5 1

70

1 0 9

3 6

c

a

b

d

e



DIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERSDIMENSIONS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1/32 -2006

F111E - F112E Motor Control Mechanism :

F71/F82 - F83/F82E - F83E/F91E - F92E/F101E - F102E Motor Control Mechanism :

F31 - F32 - F33/F51 - F52 - F53 Motor Control Mechanism :

300

4 1 7

230

392

4 1 2

250.5 119.5

3 7 6

1 4 7

210 122

97

150

142

32

105 105.5

125

119

15.5

77

1 3 4

2 6 1



CONTENTSCONTENTS

AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

General Technical Characteristics of Air Circuit Breakers

Technical Characteristics of Air Circuit Breakers

Connection Diagram and Order Codes of Air Circuit Breakers

Dimensions of Air Circuit Breakers

2/1

2

3

5

6

-2006

AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

F141EF142EF143E

F131EF132EF133E

F121EF122EF123E

F151EF152EF153E

Air Circuit BreakersAir Circuit Breakers

22



2/2 -2006

Protection of intelligent tripping gear :

1-RESET button: Push reset button after fault trip, the breaker restore close state.

2-CURRENT-TIME indicator display current or time

3-LED (light-emitting diode) can display breaker’s various status and classifications.

4-SELECT key; display the maximum phase current or maximum line voltage under normalstatus, push the key then display each phase current or each line voltage in turn.

5-CLEAN key; push the key after setting the release or test fault or before closing thebreaker in order that the breaker’s in normal work status.

6- SET key; Check or set each protection characteristic current or time. Push the key thendisplay each status in turn.

7-FAULT-CHECK key; display or indicate the last fault status and fault current or time whenpush the key.

8-TRIP and NON-TRIP key; for test function time.

9-STORAGE, + and – key; for setting current or time.

Indicated parts are standards, Indicated parts are manufactured according to customer’s special orders.* Opening time can adjust as 1s, 3s, 5s, 7s, 9s, 10s.

1

2

345

6 7

89

F121E F122E F123E F131E F132E F133E F141E F142E F143E

2500, 3200

3,4

415

750 V

8

3(0,4-1)In

80

65

65

A, B

Electronic

Fixed / Drawer

IL=(0,4-1)In

Is=(0,4-15)In

I›=In-50 kA

IG=(0,2-0,8)In

10000

3000

4000

3,4

415

750 V

8

3(0,4-1)In

80

65

65

A, B

Electronic

Fixed / Drawer

IL=(0,4-1)In

Is=(0,4-15)In

I›=In-50 kA

IG=(0,2-0,8)In

8000

3000

Type

Rated current - In

Number of pole

Rated operational voltage - Ue (a.c.) 50-60 Hz

Rated insulation voltage - Ui (a.c.) 50-60 Hz


Testing voltage (1 min) (a.c.) 50-60 HzRated current adjust field

Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity - Icu 415V~

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity - Ics 415V~

Rated short time withstand current - Icw 1s 415 V~

Category (EN 60947-2 / IEC 60947-2)

Tripping release type

Mounting method

Long time delay

Short time delay

Instantaneous

Earth fault

Mechani cal l if e Opera ti on With mai ntenanceWithout maintenance

Accessories

Undervoltage release *

Shunt trip

Closing coil

Auxiliary contact

Motor control mechanism

Inverser lock

A

V

V

kV

kVIn

(kA rms)

(kA rms)

(kA rms)

70

35

35

100

65

65

70

35

35

100

80

80

70

35

35

100

80

80

Technical characteristics ofair circuit breakersIEC 60947-2

EN 60947-2CE

F151E F152E F153E

5000

3,4

415

1000 V

8

3(0,4-1)In

80

65

65

A, B

Electronic

Drawer

IL=(0,4-1)In

Is=(0,4-15)In

I›=In-50 kA

IG=(0,2-0,8)In

10000

2500

70

35

35

120

100

100

630,800,1000

1250,1600,2000

3,4

415

750 V

8

3(0,4-1)In

80

50

50

A, B

Electronic

Fixed / Drawer

IL=(0,4-1)In

Is=(0,4-15)In

I›=In-50 kA

IG=(0,2-0,8)In

10000

3000

GENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERSGENERAL TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS



22

2/3-2006

Protection functions: Various functions such as over-loadlong inverse time lag, short inverse time lag, short timedelay f ixed t ime-lag and spl i t -second response areavailable for users to configura te different protectioncharacteristics.Single-phase earthing protection characteristics.

Display function: Current setting Ir display and actioncurrent display.

Ampere-meter function: To monitor main circuit current

Alarm function: Overload alarm Self-checking: Over-heating protection and microcom-

puter self-diagnosis Test function: To test the action properties of trippinggear

Note: The breaker can be equipped with a communicatiorinterface to perform remote control, remote adjustment andremote monitoring through a computer within the distanceof 1km on useiJs requirement.

Intelligent Controller Characteristics :

Protection characteristics of over-current tripping gear :

The setting value and the error of the tripping gear are shown in the below mentioned table.

Fig-1: The protection characteristics of the over-current tripping gear is shown in fig-1.Fig-2: The earthing fault protection characteristics is of specified-time. Its protection property is shown in fig-2.

Time Action FuntionThe inverse time action characteristics of the long delay over-current protection is shown in the below table.

Long delay Short delay Instantaneous Earthing fault

IL(0.4~1)ln

IS(0,4-15) IL

I›1.0ln~50kA

IG(0.2-0.8) In

Accuracy

±15%

Accuracy

±10%

Accuracy

±10%

Accuracy

±10%

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

0,5

0,2

0,1

0,05

0,02

0,01

0,005

0,002

0,001

t(s)

0,050,060,080,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30

xIn

0,40,3

0,2

0,1

IG=(0,2-0,8)In

>2h inaction <1h action

1.5 IL time setting (s) 15 30 60 120 240 480

2.0 IL action time (s) 8.4 16.9 33.7 67.5 135 270

1,05 IL 1,3 IL

Fig-1 Over-Current Protection Diagram Fig-2 Single Phase Earthing Fault Protection Diagram :

Drawer Type Circuit Breaker

During the push - pull of drawer, circuit breakers can trip automatically. In the event that drawer type circuit breakerbreakdown it can change with it’s backup in a short time.

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

0,50 ,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 1 0 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300

xIn

t(s)

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

0,5

0,2

0,1

0,05

0,02

0,01

0,005

0,002

0,001

IL=(0,4~1)IntL=(15~480)s

Is=(0,4~15)In

I›=In~50kA

0,40,3

0,2

0,1



TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2/4 -2006

The action characteristics of the short delay over-current protection.The protection characteristics of the tripping gear is ofinverse time at low-multiple current. Its I2T = (8IL2) ts,

where is a common design delayed t ime. It can beautomatically converted into specified time when theoverload current is greater than 8 lL. The specified-timeproperty is shown in table.

Setting delay time (s)

0.1 0.2

Returnable time (s)

0.06 0.140.3 0.4 0.23 0.35

Self-diagnosis functionThe tripping gear has a function to diagnose the localtrouble. If any trouble happens to the computer, thetripping gear will send an error display "E" or an alarmsignal and at the same time to restart the computer. Thebreaker can also be switch off, if it is required by user.An alarm signal will be sent, if local ambient temperaturereaches 80°C or the temperature inside housing exceeds80°C due to heat generated by the contact. The breakercan also be switched of at low current condit ion, i frequired by user.

Ampere-meter functionThe ampere meter can display main circuit current on itsliquid crystal displays (LCD). Press the selection key, themeter will display indicating lamp positioned phasecurrent or the maximum phase current . Press t heselection key once more, the meter will display anotherphase current.

Test functionPress set key to set the setting current to the value at thestatus of long delay, short delay, momentary status,

indicating lamp on, + and - respectively. Then the trippinggear test can be carried out by pressing test key. Thereare two kinds of test key: one is of non-trip test key, theother is of trip test key. Please refer to the paragraphtripping gear test in the section of erection, operation andmaintenance in detail. The non-trip test can be carried outwith the breaker operating in the network. When over-cu r ren t happens in t he ne twork , t he tes t can beautomatically stopped immediately to fulfill real over-current protection.

Set up functionThe current and the delayed time can be arbitrarily set up

by pressing function key o f long delay, short delay,momentary status, earthing, + and - according to user's

requirement. Press function key storage when the currentand the delayed time reach the required value, then the

required setting up is fulfilled. For detail, please refer to

the paragraph setting up of tripping gear in the sectionerection, operation and maintenance. When over-currenttrouble happens, this function can be automaticallystopped.

Load monitoring characteristicsTwo setting values should be set: Ic1 setting range (0.2-1)ln and Ic2 setting range (0.2-1) ln. The characteristic ofIc1 time delay is of inverse time lag with its time delay

setting to be half of the long time delay setting. There aretwo kinds of property of Ic2 time delay: the first kind is of

inverse time lag with its time delay setting to be quarter ofthe long time delay setting; the second kind is of fixed

timing limit with its time delay setting to be 60 seconds.The former kind is used to stop the most unimportant sub-

level load when the current reaches the over-currentsetting. The later kind is used to stop the unimpor tant

sub-level load when the current exceeds Ic1 so as to keeppower supply for main circuit and important load. Whenthe current is reduced to Ic2, an instruction will be sent

after a period of time delay to switch on the stoppedunimportant sub-level circuit and to restore power supply

of the whole system. Please refer to figure 3 and figure 4for load monitor function.

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

6

2

1

0,6

0,2

0,1

0,05 0,060,060,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30

t(s)

xInfig-3

IL=(0,4-1) In

Ic1=(0,2-1) InIc2=(0,2-1) In

tL=15-480s

tlc1=tL /2tlc2=tL /4

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

10

6

2

1

0,6

0,2

0,1

0,05 0,060,060,1 0,2 0,3 0 ,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30

t(s)

xInfig-4

IL=(0,4-1) InIc1=(0,2-1) InIc2=(0,2-1) In

tL=15-480s

tlc2=60s

tlc1=tL /2



Order Codes :

OperatingCurrent (A)

630800

1000125016002000

25003200

4000

Fixed Type

9AL-ESS43-06309AL-ESS43-08009AL-ESS43-10009AL-ESS43-12509AL-ESS43-16009AL-ESS43-2000

9AM-ESS43-25009AM-ESS43-3200

9AN-ESS43-4000

F121E

F131E

F141E

Type Drawer Type

9AL-ESC43-06309AL-ESC43-08009AL-ESC43-10009AL-ESC43-12509AL-ESC43-16009AL-ESC43-2000

9AM-ESC43-25009AM-ESC43-3200

9AN-ESC43-4000

9AM-ESE43-25009AM-ESE43-3200

9AN-ESE43-4000

Manual Charging Version

630800

1000125016002000

9AL-EMS43-06309AL-EMS43-08009AL-EMS43-10009AL-EMS43-12509AL-EMS43-16009AL-EMS43-2000

F122E

9AL-EMC43-06309AL-EMC43-08009AL-EMC43-10009AL-EMC43-12509AL-EMC43-16009AL-EMC43-2000

9AL-EME43-06309AL-EME43-08009AL-EME43-10009AL-EME43-12509AL-EME43-16009AL-EME43-2000

630800

1000125016002000

9AL-EHS43-06309AL-EHS43-08009AL-EHS43-10009AL-EHS43-12509AL-EHS43-16009AL-EHS43-2000

F123E

9AL-EHC43-06309AL-EHC43-08009AL-EHC43-10009AL-EHC43-12509AL-EHC43-16009AL-EHC43-2000

9AL-EHE43-06309AL-EHE43-08009AL-EHE43-10009AL-EHE43-12509AL-EHE43-16009AL-EHE43-2000

200025003200

9AM-EMS43-20009AM-EMS43-25009AM-EMS43-3200

F132E9AM-EMC43-20009AM-EMC43-25009AM-EMC43-3200

9AM-EME43-20009AM-EME43-25009AM-EME43-3200

200025003200

9AM-EHS43-20009AM-EHS43-25009AM-EHS43-3200

F133E9AM-EHC43-20009AM-EHC43-25009AM-EHC43-3200

9AM-EHE43-20009AM-EHE43-25009AM-EHE43-3200

4000 9AN-EMS43-4000F142E 9AN-EMC43-4000 9AN-EME43-4000

4000 9AN-EHS43-4000F143E 9AN-EHC43-4000 9AN-EHE43-4000

9AL-ESF43-06309AL-ESF43-08009AL-ESF43-10009AL-ESF43-12509AL-ESF43-16009AL-ESF43-2000

9AM-ESF43-25009AM-ESF43-3200

9AN-ESF43-4000

9AL-ESE43-06309AL-ESE43-08009AL-ESE43-10009AL-ESE43-12509AL-ESE43-16009AL-ESE43-2000

Motor Charging Version

9AL-EMF43-06309AL-EMF43-08009AL-EMF43-10009AL-EMF43-12509AL-EMF43-16009AL-EMF43-2000

9AL-EHF43-06309AL-EHF43-08009AL-EHF43-10009AL-EHF43-12509AL-EHF43-16009AL-EHF43-2000

9AM-EMF43-20009AM-EMF43-25009AM-EMF43-3200

9AM-EHF43-20009AM-EHF43-25009AM-EHF43-3200

9AN-EMF43-4000

9AN-EHF43-4000F151E

F152E

F153E

5000

5000

5000

9AN-EHC43-5000

9AN-EHC43-5000

9AN-EHC43-5000

9AN-EHE43-5000

9AN-EHE43-5000

9AN-EHE43-5000

-

-

-

-

-

-

Drawer TypeFixed Type

2/5-2006

M: Energy storage motorF: Shunt tripping gear

SB1: Shunt buttonSB2: Under-voltage buttonSB3: Close button

Q : Under-voltage tripping gear or Under-voltage time delay tripping gear

Main circuit Over-current trip Emergency break Electric break Electric close Auxiliary switch

+ -

Tripping Power Supply

Power Supply

Trouble Close

SB2

SB1

J2

SB3 Energy Storage Switch Off

Handingunit

Electronic trip

Q F X M

SA

3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47

1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 37 40 43 46

Fig-5

X : Close magnetSA : Limit switch of motor

CONNECTION DIAGRAM AND ORDER CODES of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERSCONNECTION DIAGRAM AND ORDER CODES of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

22



2/6 -2006

In A

630

800-1600

2000

d mm

10

15

20

413 (4 poles)

318 (3 poles)

Ø13

340 (3 poles)

435 (4 poles)

150 69.5

290

5 5

1 1 2

3 3 5 4

0 2

d

F121E-F122E-F123E (Fixed Type) :

448 (4 poles)353 (3 poles)

4 3 9

292

375 (3 poles)470 (4 poles)

45 421

97 175 139

9 2

1 1 2

d

In A

630

800-1600

2000

d mm

10

15

20

17533

Ø14

Ø11

2 6 5

3 6 0

F121E-F122E-F123E (Drawer Type) :

2 1 .

5

302

172

344 15.5Ø5

2 6 8

20

3 7 8 3

0 2

1 5 5

DIMENSIONS of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERSDIMENSIONS of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS



DIMENSIONS of AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2/7-2006

In A

2000-2500

3200

d mm

20

30Ø13

493 (4 poles)378 (3 poles)

400 (3 poles)

515 (4 poles)150

290

69.5

1 1 2

5 5

3 3 5 4

0 2

d


In A

2000-25003200

d mm

2030

528 (4 poles)

413 (3 poles)

352435 (3 poles)

500 (4 poles)

4 3 9

4597 175 139

421

1 1 2

9 2

d

33 175

Ø14

Ø11

4 4 0

3 2 5


2 1 .

5

2 6 8

20

Ø5

362

202

404

1 5 5

3 0 2

3 7 8

15.5

404

2 6 9

2 8 .

5 2

3 1 1

362

8- Ø 5


22





528 (4 poles)413 (3 poles)

352435 (3 poles)

550 (4 poles)

4 3 9

4 4 0

Ø11

2 11x17

33175

Ø14

2 1 .

5

2 6 8

20

Ø5

362

202

404

1 5 5

3 0 2

3 7 8

15.545

97 175 139

421

1 1 2

9 2

2/8 -2006

2 1 .

5

2 6 8

20

Ø5

362

202

404

1 5 5

3 0 2

3 7 8

15.5



528 (4 poles)413 (3 poles)

352435 (3 poles)

550 (4 poles)

4 3 9

4 4 0

Ø11

2 11x17

33175

Ø14

2 1 .

5

2 6 8

20

Ø5

362

202

404

1 5 5

3 0 2

3 7 8

15.545

97 175 139

421

1 1 2

9 2

928 (4 poles)

813 (3 poles)

835 (4 poles)

352 (3 poles)

Ø 1 4


494

97 175 139

3 0

1 1 2

9 2

7 0 3

2-11X17

33175

4 4 9



33

LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSES

General Information About Load Break Switches & Switch Fuses

Technical Characteristic and Pictures of Switch Fuses

Technical Characteristic and Pictures of Load Break Switches

Dimensions and Installation Diagram

3/1

LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSES

2

4

5

6

-2006

FSF 160 FSF 250FSF 400

FSF 630

FLS 160 FLS 250FLS 400

FLS 630

Switch Fuses

Load Break Switches

Switch Fuses

Load Break Switches

CONTENTSCONTENTS



Load break switches & switch fuses consist of contact

system with constant contact which placed moulded case.

Breaking energy is divided between contacts with this

system. Combustion in contact is kept minimum due to

energy is dividing between contacts and arc extinguisher

elements in the breaking chamber. Getting small combustion

extends the life of contacts.

160A switches are manufactured with friction and high value

switches are manufactured with using rolling contact. Friction

and rolling contact systems provide clear and precise

touching at every opening and closing of switch. Passing

resistance and loss of energy among the contacts are limited

to minimum with respect as a special spring. Current is

broken from same phase and at four different points in the

switch (except 160 A). This feature builds up current breaking

capacity of switch and fuses separated from the circuit at

two points. (Pic-1)

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSESGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSES

General characteristics :

The Federal Load Break Switches & Switch Fuses have

been designed to provide a compact, instantly opening-

closed with rolling or friction contact. They have a breaking

feature from same phase and four different points and are

high performance devices. Load break switches are

manufactured with or without fuses according to the IEC-

EN 60947-3 and VDE-0660 standards, CE certificate and

AC 23 class. Due to this feature they are used at AC and

DC systems and motor circuit.

Various combinations and types with high amperes which

are not shown in this catalogue are manufactured accordig

to special orders.

3/2

• High breaking capacity,

• High electrical and mechanical endurance,

• Rolling contact system (except for 160 A) capable of self-

cleaning,

• Double breaking on each phase,

• Modern technology and compact design,

• Quick making and breaking operation independent of

manuel operation,

• Small dimension,

•Case made of thermoset material, non absorbing and

flame-heat resistant,

• Capable of mounting to front or rear side of panel cover.

General features :

Safety :

Contacts :

- Off “0” position both fuse terminals will not be alive so the

fuses can be changed, safely.

- On “I” position the handle will be locked mechanically, so

the panel cannot be opened while energized.

- Off “0” position the handle can be blocked out with a

padlock so that it may prevent any unauthorized personnel

to energize the panel.

- The isolation distance between the phases is rather wide

to prevent arc jumping.

- Additional fuse protection shields are used for better

isolation and protection in the switch fuses.

- Arc separators are used for arc extinguishing between

contacts which occur during closing or breaking process.

Opening-closing mechanism and control handle :

Opening-closing mechanism has been provided to operate

the poles altogether and very rapidly. Speed of opening

and closing is independent from hand moving. Control

handle is passing type. The handle extention is necessary

for all cases supplied in the length, than it is cut by the

customer at the desired length. The position of switch can

be seen by means of indicating plate and control handle.

Switching angle for ON/OFF operation is 90 degrees.

Locking with

padlock “0”

position

Pic-2

-2006

Pic-1

Rolling contact system (250A, 400A, 630A)



Frame and cover are molded from glass-polyester material,

BMC (Bulk Moulding Compound) in literature that combines

ruggedness and high dieletric stength, as well as high

mechanical resistance in a compact design. Connection

bars are plated with silver. Capable of mounting to front or

rearside of panel cover.

33

Pic-3

3,4

3,4

Order Codes :

Number of poles

FSF 160

FSF 250

FSF 400

FSF 630

FLS 160

FLS 250

FLS 400

FLS 630

Type

9BB-S110-0160

9BC-S110-0250

9BC-S110-0400

9BD-S110-0630

9BB-L110-0160

9BC-L110-0250

9BC-L110-0400

9BD-L110-0630

Order codes

Note : pole number is written (like 3 or 4) * Switch fuses can dispatch without NH fuse.

FSF160 A

FSF250-FSF400 A

FLS160 A

FLS250-FLS400 A

Type

Terminal Cover Order Codes :

8BA-G0000-0000

8BB-G0000-0000

8BA-H0000-0000

8BB-H0000-0000

FLS160 A

FLS250-FLS400 A

Type

Upper Terminal Protection Cover Order Codes :

8BA-D0000-0000

8BB-D0000-0000

3/3

Inside construction :

Current is broken from the four separate points in a rolling

contact system. This way the breaking capacity is increased

and when the circuit breaker is in open position, fuses areseperated from the circuit completely.

- Opening closing position are not depending on hand

actuated.

- High speed opening-closing can be done thanks to the

springs in mechanism.

Frictional system is applied at type of 160 A. In this way this

system provides clear and precise touching at every opening

and closed. Especially contact destruction is prevented by

rolling contact system. Arc extinguishers are used for arc

extinguishing between contacts which occur during making

or breaking process.

Operating principle :By means of a special sling rolling contact system, moving

contacts are mechanically connected to the operating handle

to ensure a positive ON/OFF action and a forced operation

of contacts. Any damage to contact is prevented in the

rolling contact.

Following accessories are available,

-Cage type connection terminals

- Terminal protective covers (Pic-4)

- Neutral link available

- Auxiliary conctact block 1NO + 1 NC for remoteindication of switch status.

- Special interlock and padlock system.

Accessories :

Frame and cover :

-2006

Pic-4 Terminal covers

Switch fuse withterminal cover

Note: Terminal cover prevent to contact of switch fuse

cable connection terminal with hand. This feature provides

safe the insulation according to CE certificate.

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSESGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE LOAD BREAK SWITCHES & SWITCH FUSES



3/4 -2006

Switch Fuses

Dimensions

Tip

FSF 160

FSF 250

FSF 400

FSF 630

185

255.5

317

A

37

43.5

50

E

142

163

243

B

123

138.5

202

C

105

127

164

D

43.5

65

89

F

15

15.5

16.5

G

32

33

54

H

28

32

37

J

3

4

6

K

20

2530

40

L

8

11

13

Ø

13

15

83.5

M

160

220

220

N

12

20.5

14

P

152

197

222.5

R

10-70

S

FSF 160FSF 250FSF 400 FSF 630


A

V

Hz

kVAr

kW

A

A

NH

kA

Operation

Operation

kg.

mm2

kW

kW

FSF 160 FSF 250 FSF 400 FSF 630Type


3 , 4

160

1000

8

40-60

75

100

120

76

1280

1600

65

00

10000

1000

2.7

70

3 , 4

250

1000

8

40-60

132

160

220

140

2000

2500

65

1

10000

1000

4.7

120

3 , 4

400

1000

8

40-60

200

280

360

220

3200

4000

65

2

10000

1000

4.8

240

3 , 4

630

1000

8

40-60

320

340

400

300

5040

6300

65

3

8000

1000

8.7

2x185

Number of pole

Rated thermal current (lth)

Rated insulation voltage

Rated frequency

Reactive power

Rated operating power

AC23

Rated breaking capacity

Rated closed capacity

Fuse type

Rated fuses short circuit breaking capacity

Mechanical life

Electrical life

Weight

Min.connection conductor cross-section

380V

AC 23

AC 23

(Ui)

380V

500V

690V

kV

4. Pole

Rear Connection

(Mounting foot for FSF 630)

SWITCH FUSESSWITCH FUSES



33

3/5-2006

Tip

FLS 160

FLS 250

FLS 400

FLS 630

185

255.5

317

A

37

43.5

50

E

142

163

243

B

123

138.5

202

C

105

127

164

D

43.5

65

89

F

15

15.5

16.5

G

32

33

54

H

28

32

37

J

3

4

6

K

20

2530

40

L

8

11

13

Ø

13

15

83.5

M

160

220

220

N

12

20.5

14

P

152

197

222.5

R

10-70

S

Load Break Switches

Dimensions

FLS 160FLS 250FLS 400 FLS 630


FLS 160 FLS 250 FLS 400 FLS 630Type


3,4

160

1000

8

40-60

75

100

120

76

1280

1600

65

20

8

10000

1000

2.6

70

3,4

250

1000

8

40-60

132

160

220

140

2000

2500

65

35

15

10000

1000

4.4

120

3,4

400

1000

8

40-60

200

280

360

220

3200

4000

65

35

15

10000

1000

4.5

240

3,4

630

1000

8

40-60

320

340

400

300

5040

6300

65

60

25

8000

1000

8.5

2x185

Number of pole

Rated thermal current (lth)


Rated frequency

Reactive power

Rated operating power

AC23



Mechanical life

Short-circuit making capacity

Electrical life

Weight

Min.connection conductor cross-section

Short-time withstand current

380V

500V

690V

380V

AC 23

AC 23

(Ui)

Ad.

A

kV

Hz

kVAr

kW

A

A

kApeak

kg.

mm2

kA/1s

kW

kW

V

Rated fuses short circuit breaking capacity kA

Ø

4. Pole

Rear Connection

(Mounting foot for FLS 630)

Operation

Operation

LOAD BREAK SWITCHESLOAD BREAK SWITCHES



DIMENSIONS AND INSTALLATION DIAGRAMDIMENSIONS AND INSTALLATION DIAGRAM

3/6 -2006

Upper terminal protection cover : Right and left terminal protective cover :

Control handle Shaft extension Door drilling template

for FSF type

for FLS type

for FLS and FSF type



CONTENTS


VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES

-2006

General Information About Vertical Type Switch Fuses

Technical Characteristics of Vertical Type Switch Fuses

Dimensions of Vertical Type Switch Fuses

2

3

4

4/1

VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES

FVS160 FVS630FVS250 FVS400

CONTENTS


44



Vertical Type Switch Fuse are manufactured according to the

IEC 60947-3,CE Certificate and AC23 class.FVS Vertical Type

Switch Fuses are used for electrical distribution,protection of

short-circuit and overload current.

Features:

-Each phase opens and breaks independent of other phases

-Design of mounting to horizontal bar as vertical.

-High short-circuit braking capacity

-Easy mounting

-High electrical and mechanical endurance

-Modern technology and compact design

-Low power loss

-Melting of fuse wire can be seen from outside.

-In normal circuit conditions, it is suitable to making, carryingand breaking of load current. It is also be closed on the short-circuit .

-On the open position, determinated conditions for switchesare carried out both terminal of each phase.

-Isolative parts isolates from parts with voltage in the level ofnominal isolation.

-Fuse holder is made of high quality material which is durableto abnormal heat and voltage. Parts with voltage isolatesin the level of nominal isolation.

-Fuse handle mounts and separates to base. It is not neededextra apart for this operate.

-Fuse handle

-Under the energize of the system, it is suitable to mount bya authorized personnel with using of equipment on front sideof the panel.

-All parts of vertical switch fuse capable of self-extinguishing,halojen-free and doesn’t included heavy metals.

-Cover is made of high quality material which is durable toabnormal heat and voltage. Parts with voltage isolates inthe level of nominal isolation.

-Contact is made of E-Cu 57 electrolytic copper and coverwith 3mm silver.

-2006 4/2

General:

FVS160

Frame Case

Handle

TerminalCover

FVS250/FVS400/FVS630

Frame

Handle

TerminalCover

Case

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSESGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES



TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES

-2006 4/3

Switch Fuses :

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

Ad.

A

V

Hz

FVS160 FVS250 FVS400 FVS630TYPE


3

160

1000

8

40-60

76

1280

1600

50

00

1600

200

2.6

70

185

20

M8

2000

-25 °C

+55 °C

+35 °C not exceed

%50 at +40 °C

%90 at +20 °C

Operating continuously

IV

3

IP20

9BE-D1203-0160

3

250

1000

12

40-60

140

2000

2500

50

1

1600

200

6.8

120

185

32

M12

3

400

1000

12

40-60

220

3200

4000

50

2

1000

200

6.8

240

185

32

M12

3

630

1000

12

40-60

300

5040

6300

50

3

1000

200

7.2

2x185

185

56

M12

Number of Pole

Rated Thermal Current (Ith)

Rated Insulation Voltage

Rated frequency

kVAr

A

A

NH

kArms

Operation

Operation

kg.

mm2

Reactive powers



Fuse type (it is dispacted without fuse)

Rated fuses short circuit braking capacity

Mechanical life

Electrical life

Weight

Connection conductor cross-section

380V

AC 22-B

AC 22-B

(Ui)

kV

Distance between main Bar Terminal mm

Maksimum-squeeze torque Nm

IEC 947-3

EN 60947-3

CE

Diameter of hole Ø

Max.using high

Ambiant temperature

Min.

Max.

24 hours average

Relative humidity

Operating conditions

Excessive voltage class (according to IEC 60664)

Pollution degree

Protection class

Order code 9BE-D1203-0250 9BE-D1203-0400 9BE-D1203-0630

m

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES

44



DIMENSIONS OF VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES

-2006 4/4

FVS160 Type :

FVS250/400/630 Type :

DIMENSIONS OF VERTICAL TYPE SWITCH FUSES



55

NH (H.R.C) FUSESAND FUSE BASES

General Information About NH (H.R.C) Fuses

Super Flink NH Fuses Bases

Technical Characteristic Dimension and Order Codes of NH (HRC) Fuses

Technical Characteristic Dimension and Order Codes of NH (HRC) Fuse Bases

Maksimum Power Loses Table

5/1

NH (H.R.C) FUSESAND FUSE BASES

2

3

4

5

6

-2006

NH2-FB(80A...400A)

NH3-FB(250A...630A)

NH00-FB(6A...160A)

NH0-FB(25A...160A)

NH1-FB(50A...250A)

NHC00-FB(6A...100A)

NH00-FA

NH0-FA

NH1-FA

NH2-FA

NH3-FA

STEATITBMC

NH (H.R.C) Fuses

NH (H.R.C) Fuse Bases

NH (H.R.C) Fuses

NH (H.R.C) Fuse Bases

CONTENTSCONTENTS



GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT NH (H.R.C) FUSESGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT NH (H.R.C) FUSES

5/2

General :

Fuses are protective device in which the melting or more fusibleelements open a circuit and interrupt the current if the currentexceeds a set value for a given length of time.Federal NH (H.R.C.) fuses and fuse bases are produced in

according to VDE 636, IEC 60269/EN 60269, DIN 43620standards and CE certificate.According to the above mentioned standards the H.R.C. fusesshould have a higher breaking capacity than 50 kA. FederalNH (H.R.C.) fuses have a breaking capacity of 120 kA. Federalhas a wide range of H.R.C. products. Rated voltages are 500V. AC and 440 V DC. Rated current is up to 630 A. Our productsprotect your panels, cables and installation reliability Figure-3 gives the time-current character›st›c of the fuses. The curvesshow that fuse’s response time(+) which is connected withload current. It is clear from the figure that at higher currentrates the response time is shorter.Federal NH fuses have characteristic of delayed and it is strongto Asynchrone motor’s openning current. It makes protection

against short circuit, boasting current and opens circuitimmediately. “gL/Gg” mark’s mean is line protection and thisclass of fuses are used for protection of cabel and conductors.From the time-current curve it is clear that fuses can operateto 1.6 time higher of its rated value and breaking capacity ofcircuit for a 5xIn value in 5 seconds. The melting wires (fusibleelement) of the fuses cartridges are produced in differentshape and sizes for various current rated. Over the meltingwire small chambers are put together. In case of short-circuitand over load different section with the same diameter meltdown and form partical sparks. As a result of the short-circuitcurrent is extinguished and the heat is evenly transferred alongthe fuse.The external body of the fuses should be resistant to the high

current temperature and pressure caused arcs during themelting of the fuse wire. Therefore for this wire to melt, thecurrent energy should be higher than the wires maximumresistance. During the process of the wire melting along andinside the length of the fuse body, the current continues to flowfirstly as liquefied metal and secondly as steamed metal beforeeventually losing it’s energy. This is visible in the form of an arc(Fig-1) and therefore there is an immense increase of heat andpressure during this action on the inside of the fuse body. Thefuse body must hold resistance to such actions otherwise willbe damaged and lose its purpose. To avoid such circumstancethe material used for the fuse body should be made accordinglyto the IEC 672 standards.Federal fuses cartridge are produced to withstand shock

temperatures and dynamic stresses.Federal fuses cartidge contacts are made from special brassand silver plated. In time the silver plate becomes dark colored.However,this is not important,because silver sulphur with currentheat becomes conductive.

Selective Protection (Selectivity)Selectivity means that any fault occurs in a system is eliminatedby the close protection equipment so that the rest of the systemcontinuous ›ts normal operation.Accordig to “gL/gG” operation class, NH fuses bases which have%60 nominal circuit selectivly in high short circuit current. Forselectivity,fuses must be choosen according to table (Fig-2)

-2006

Fig-2

6 1 0

1 6

2 0 2 5 3 2

3 5

4 0

5 0 6 3 8 0

1 0 0

1 2 5

1 6 0

2 0 0

2 5 0

3 1 5

4 0 0

5 0 0

6101620253235

40506380

100125160200

315400500630

SELECTIVE PROTECTION (SELECTIVITY)NOMINAL CURRENT 1th FUSE

N O M I N A L C U R R E N T O

F 2 t h F U S E

1th FUSE

2 n d

F U S E

250

Selective Tablethree phase, selective at 380 V.three phase, selective at 500 V.

8CB-A0000-00008CB-A0000-00008CB-A0000-0000

1 2 3

227227227

116116116

OrderCodes Size

Phase seperator dimensions(mm)a b

Quartz Sand :

Fuse bases are produced in five size and steatit or BMCcartridge according to request of customers. The basescontacts are produced 00 and 0 size with clemence orscrew, other sizes have only screw connectionThe bases contacts are made of electrolytic copper andreinforced with steel segments in addition to ›ts owncompression and elasticity characteristic. Grabbing capacityof conducts is higher than other bases. If bases are puttogether side by side. Pertinaks seperaters which is givenas accessory is used for rising of phase isolation.When fuses are placed in their bases, the fuses blade mustsit on base exactly. Otherwise incapable contact will causeloss of resistance, temperature and power, failures.Conductors must be mounted for bases and cross-sectionswhich is suitable to standars.

NH(HRC) Fuses Bases :

Inside of the body is Quartz Sand. This distinctiveness ofthe sand is that it is high pure, clean and unhumid. Alsothe sand is tightly contained in the fuse using a vibrationmethod to lock out any air and maintain the sufficiency ofsand. During melting of the wire, the sand helps cool downthe arc and insulates the distance between the broken fusewire points for quicker and more efficient energy decrease.

Fig - 1 Diagram of current and voltage changing when the damage currentis broken by the fuse.

Voltage

Current

Ip

Io

Ik(t)

ts tl

lo: passing current,lk(t): short circuit current that will pass,if a metallic bridge be inside of fuse.lp: peak value of the short circuit currentts: fusion timet1: extinguishing time



55

NH Super flink fuses :

The super flink fuses are used to protected the power electronicelement, such as diode, thrystor in AC and DC againstovercurrent and short-circuit. Pure silver materials are used asa melting lace wire. This is the most important differencebetween NH (H.R.C) (fusable cut out) fuses, and LV NH(H.R.C.) fuse flinks.

Increasing of temperature of super flink fuses is very high incomparison with line protection device (in operating class gL,Gg) as shown in time-current characteristics curve. (Fig-5) Sothat precise protection is supplied at the value of rated current.This means that these super flink fuses take into account allaspects of electrical safety.

Operating characteristic: Super flink (Rapid)Rated voltage : AC 500 V.Operating class : gRBreaking capacity : 100 kA (effective)Dimensions of super flink fuses are same as NH fuses.

Rated current :

NH super flink fuses are manufactured in the following size

and with the following rated currents.00, 1, 2 at 3 size and from 25 A. to 400 A.

Order codes :

5/3-2006

Time - current characteristics of super flink NH (H.R.C) fuses "gR"Load current Ampere

O p e n i n g t i m e

S e c o n

d

2 5

3 2

4 0

5 0

6 3

8 0

1 0 0

1 2 5

1 8 0

2 0 0

2 5 0

3 1 5

4 0 0

10000

4000

2000

1000

400

200

100

40

20

10

4

2

1

0.4

0.2

0.1

0.04

0.02

0.01

4 2 0

3 0

4 0

5 0

1 0 0

2 0 0

3 0 0

4 0 0

5 0 0

1 0 0 0

2 0 0 0

3 0 0 0

4 0 0 0

5 0 0 0

Breaking current diagram

10000

5000

1000

3000

500300

100

50

30

10

5

3

1

1

7 0 0

5 0 0

3 0 0

1 0 0 0

7 0

5 0

3 0

1 0 0 7 5 3

1 0

M a x . v a l u e o f c u r r e n t

k

A p e a

k

Expected current kAeff

2√2 Ip

630 A400 A250 A160 A100 A

Fig-5

Fig-4

Time - current characteristics of NH (H.R.C) fuses “gL/gG”Loading current (effective value) Ampere

10000

5000

1000

3000

500300

100

50

30

10

5

3

1

0,50,3

0,1 1 0

6 1 0

1 6

2 0

2 5

3 2

4 0

5 0

6 3

8 0

1 0 0

1 2 5

1 6 0

2 0 0

2 5 0

3 1 5

4 0 0

5 0 0

6 3 0

7 0 0 0

5 0 0 0

3 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0

7 0 0

5 0 0

3 0 0

1 0 0 0

7 0

5 0

3 0

1 0 0

O p e n i n g t i m e

S e c o n

d

Fig-3

Order Code

9CB-BH000-0025

9CB-BH000-0032

9CB-BH000-0040

9CB-BH000-0050

9CB-BH000-0063

9CB-BH000-0080

9CB-BH000-0100

9CB-BH000-0125

9CD-BH000-0100

9CD-BH000-0125

Size Rated current

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

1

1

25 A

32 A

40 A

50 A

63 A

80 A

100 A

125 A

100 A

125 A

9CD-BH000-0160

9CD-BH000-0200

9CD-BH000-0250

9CE-BH000-0200

9CE-BH000-0250

9CE-BH000-0280

9CE-BH000-0315

9CE-BH000-0355

9CE-BH000-0400

9CE-BH000-0630

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

160 A

200 A

250 A

200 A

250 A

280 A

315 A

355 A

400 A

630 A

Type

NHG00-FB

NHG00-FB

NHG00-FB

NHG00-FB

NHG00-FB

NHG00-FB

NHG00-FB

NHG00-FB

NHG1-FB

NHG1-FB

NHG1-FB

NHG1-FB

NHG1-FB

NHG2-FB

NHG2-FB

NHG2-FB

NHG2-FB

NHG2-FB

NHG2-FB

NHG3-FB

Order CodeRated currentSizeType

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT NH (H.R.C) FUSESGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT NH (H.R.C) FUSES

NH SUPER FLINK FUSESNH SUPER FLINK FUSES



-2006 5/4

Ordercode

Size Ratedcurrent(A)

Quantity/ box

Kg./ box

1.225

1.225

1.225

1.225

1.225

1.225

1.225

1.225

1.225

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

1.760

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1.300

1.300

1.300

1.300

1.300

1.300

1.300

1.300

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

2.005

2.005

2.005

2.005

2.005

2.005

2.005

2.005

0.980

0.980

0.980

0.980

0.980

C00

C00C00

C00

C00

C00

C00

C00

C00

C00

C00

1.305

1.3051.305

1.305

1.305

1.305

1.305

1.305

1.305

1.305

1.305

Compact

Note : * The signed currents are manufactured on request.

6

10

16

20

25

32

35

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

250

80

100

125

160

200

250

315

400

250

315

400

500

630

6

10 16

20

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

150 73.5 62 68 32 75 69 70

150 73.5 62 68 25 60 57 58

135 71 62 68 20 54 45 51

125 71 62 66 15 48 29.5 44.5

78.5 54 45 44.549 15 48 29.5

a1 a2 a3 a4 b e1 e2 e3

78.5 54 45 4549 15 36 21

DIMENSIONS (mm)

NHC00-FB

NH00-FB

NH0-FB

NH1-FB

NH2-FB

NH3-FB

6

e2

e 1

e 3

1 010

10

e 1

1 0

e2

e 3

6

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

10

1010

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

9CB-BG000-0006

9CB-BG000-0010

9CB-BG000-0016

9CB-BG000-0020

9CB-BG000-0025

9CB-BG000-0032

9CB-BG000-0035*

9CB-BG000-0040

9CB-BG000-0050

9CB-BG000-0063

9CB-BG000-0080

9CB-BG000-0100

9CB-BG000-0125

9CB-BG000-0160

9CC-BG000-0025

9CC-BG000-0032

9CC-BG000-0040

9CC-BG000-0050

9CC-BG000-0063

9CC-BG000-0080

9CC-BG000-0100

9CC-BG000-0125

9CC-BG000-0160

9CD-BG000-0050*

9CD-BG000-0063*

9CD-BG000-0080

9CD-BG000-0100

9CD-BG000-0125

9CD-BG000-0160

9CD-BG000-0200

9CD-BG000-0250

9CE-BG000-0080*

9CE-BG000-0100*

9CE-BG000-0125*

9CE-BG000-0160

9CE-BG000-0200

9CE-BG000-0250

9CE-BG000-0315

9CE-BG000-0400

9CF-BG000-0500

9CF-BG000-0630

9CF-BG000-0315

9CF-BG000-0400

9CF-BG000-0250*

9CA-BG000-0006

9CA-BG000-00109CA-BG000-0016

9CA-BG000-0020

9CA-BG000-0025

9CA-BG000-0032

9CA-BG000-0040

9CA-BG000-0050

9CA-BG000-0063

9CA-BG000-0080

9CA-BG000-0100

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, DIMENSIONS and ORDER CODES of NH (H.R.C) FUSESTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, DIMENSIONS and ORDER CODES of NH (H.R.C) FUSES



55

-2006 5/5

NH00-FA

NH0-FA

BMC

Steatit

BMC

BMC

BMC

Steatit

NH1-FA

Steatit

NH2-FA

NH3-FA

BMC

Steatit

Order code :9CB-C0 00-0000 (BMC)9CB-A0 00-0000 (Steatit)

C - with screw K - with clemens

X - with screwSize : 00Rated current : 160 AQuantity/box : 5Kg./box : 0.795 (BMC)

1.060 (Steatit)Dimensions (mm) :

a : 120 e : 23.5b : 32.5 f : M8c: 54 g: 25d : 101 h : 7.5

Order code :9CD-C0C00-0000 (BMC)9CD-A0C00-0000 (Steatit)

Size : 1Rated current : 250 AQuantity/box : 3Kg./box : 1.375 (BMC)

1.845 (Steatit)

Dimensions (mm) :a : 200 f : M10b: 47.5 g: 25c : 82 h: 10.5d: 175 k : 30e: 35

Order code :9CE-C0C00-0000 (BMC)9CE-A0C00-0000 (Steatit)



a : 225 f : M10

b: 47.5 g: 25c : 88 h: 10.5d: 200 k : 30e: 35

Order code :9CF-C0C00-0000 (BMC)9CF-A0C00-0000 (Steatit)



a : 240 f : M12b: 47.5 g: 25c : 99 h: 10.5

d: 210 k : 30e: 37

Order code :

9CC-C0 00-0000 (BMC) C - with screw K - with clemens X - with screwSize : 0Rated current : 160 A

Quantity/box : 5Kg./box : 1.020Dimensions (mm) :

a : 170 e : 30.5b: 32 f : M8c : 64.5 g : 25d : 150 h : 7.5

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, DIMENSIONS and ORDER CODES of NH (H.R.C) FUSE BASESTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, DIMENSIONS and ORDER CODES of NH (H.R.C) FUSE BASES



Power losses of NH Fuse which reaches the steady statetemperature, when the rated current passing through thecircuit. When the rated current passing through fuses, the

temperature of connecting terminal (i.e for NH (HRC) 00 size

and 160 A rated current) should not exceed 65 K.The power losses of Federal Fuses are below the IEC standars.This values are shown at the table on below table

comparatively.

5/6 -2006

For 00 and 0 size, fuse bases are produced in three models

for easy connection to cables.

With double side screw :For multi wires or bars (Fig-6a).

With double side bridge terminal :

For single core wires (Fig-6b).

With one side screw and another side terminal :

For single core wires or bars (Fig-6c).

Fuse should be fixed properly to fuse base. Otherwise there

can be an increase in the contact resistance, heating of

contact, power losses and many other kind of faults.

NH 00-FANH 0-FA

Fig-6a Fig-6b Fig-6c

NH 00-FANH 0-FA

NH 00-FANH 0-FA

Power Losses :

Size Rated current (A)TS EN 60269 IEC 60269 VDE 0636 Federal

Maximum power losses values

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

6

10

16

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

12 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

7.5 W

—

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

16 W

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

200

250

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

23 W

2

2

2

2

2

2

125

160

200

250

315

400

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

34 W

3

3

3

3

3

250

315

400

500

630

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

48 W

1.7 W

2.0 W

2.2 W

2.7 W

3.5 W

4.2 W

4.5 W

5.8 W

6.6 W

8.5 W

10.0 W

12.0 W

3.4 W

4.0 W

5.0 W

5.7 W

7.2 W

7.5 W

8.5 W

10.0 W

14.0 W

5.3 W

6.0 W

7.2 W

7.5 W

9.0 W

10.0 W

13.0 W

17.5 W

23.0 W

10.0 W

12.0 W

17.5 W

20.3 W

25.0 W

30.0 W

22.0 W

25.0 W

31.0 W

35.0 W

42.0 W

BMC (Bulk Moulding Compound)

It is moulding material which is look like dough, reinforce withrather tall fiber and it is a composite material which hasadjustment features through changing contribution materialaccording to demand features.

BMC is from termoset plastic family and it has the samefeatures with bakelite and melamine. It’s process conditionsand products have superiority and it is durable for dynamicpower and thermal shock.

MAXIMUM POWER LOSSES TABLEMAXIMUM POWER LOSSES TABLE



66

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

-2006

General and Technical Information About Miniature Circuit Breakers

Technical Table and Time-Current Diagram of Miniature Circuit Breakers

General and Technical Information About Phase-Neutral Miniature Circuit Breakers

General and Technical Information About Disconnector

Dimensions of Phase-Neutral, Miniature Circuit Breaker, Disconnector

2

3

4

5

6

6/1

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Phase-Neutral


Disconnector

FMN

FMH 6 kA

FMH 10 kA

FMB 3 kA

Phase-Neutral

FMS


Disconnector

CONTENTSCONTENTS



66

-2006 6/3

I1 ( t ≥ 1h )I2 ( t < 1h )I3 ( t ≥ 0,1s )I4 ( t < 0,1s)

1,13 x In1,45 x In3 x In5 x In

1,13 x In1,45 x In5 x In10 x In

B C

Type FMB

B, C

36,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63

230/400

690

6

1,2,3,4

50 - 60

20

Characteristic

Breaking capacityRated current

Rated operational voltage - Ue

Rated insulation voltage - Ui


Number of pole

Frequency

Mechanical life

kAA

V

V

kV

Hz

FMH

B, C

66,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63 106,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63


Time - Current diagram ( FMB In < 40 A )

60

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

20

10

6

4

2

1

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.1

0.060.04

0.02

0.01

1 2 3 4 6 8 10

x Rated current

S e c o n d

M i n u t e

Time

With B and Ccharacteristic and

IEC/EN 60898 30 °Cambient temperature

B C I4I4

I1 I2

I3 I3

Fig-1 Time - Current diagram ( FMB In=50 A, 63 A )

60

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

20

10

6

4

2

1

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.1

0.060.04

0.02

0.01

1 2 3 4 6 8 10

x Rated current

S e c o n d

M i n u t e

Time

B C I4I4

I1 I2

I3 I3



Fig-2

Time - Current diagram ( FMH )

60

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

20

10

6

4

2

1

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.1

0.06

0.04

0.02

0.01

1 2 3 4 6 8 10

x Rated current

S e c o n d

M i n u t e

Time

B C I4I4

I1 I2

I3 I3



Fig-3

TECHNICAL TABLE and TIME-CURRENT DIAGRAM OF MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERSTECHNICAL TABLE and TIME-CURRENT DIAGRAM OF MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



-2006 6/4

General :

This breaker is acceptable to a line of AC 50Hz/60Hz, rated

voltage 230V and rated current 6 to 32 A, used to protect the

line from overload and short circuit. It can also be used for

infrequent l ine conversion under normal condition.

It is a “phase wire + neutre wire” type breaker by our company,

which can switch off phase wire and neutral wire simultaneously

and features small volume and high safe performance. For a

single- pole breaker , the phase wire and neutral wire are easy

to be mis-connected or the potential of neutral wire to ground

may be higher, thus it may result in dangerous fire and injuring

people. This household breaker eliminates such shortages. It

is acceptable to office buildings, dwellin houses, and so likes.

The product is manufactured according to IEC 60898-1

standards and CE certificate.

I1 ( t ≥ 1h )I2 ( t < 1h )I3 ( t ≥ 0,1s )I4 ( t < 0,1s)

1,13 x In1,45 x In3 x In5 x In

1,13 x In1,45 x In5 x In10 x In

B C

Time - Current diagram (FMN)

60

40

20

10

6

4

2

1

20

10

6

4

2

1

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.1

0.06

0.04

0.02

0.01

1 2 3 4 6 8 10

x Rated current

S e c o n d

M i n u t e

Time



B C I4I4

I1 I2

I3 I3

N 1

N 2

Connectionscheme

RatedcurrentIn (A)

6A

10A

16A

20A

25A

32A

BreakingcapacityIcs (kA)

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

4,5

Characteristic

B

9EC-BO431-0006

9EC-B0431-0010

9EC-B0431-0016

9EC-B0431-0020

9EC-B0431-0025

9EC-B0431-0032

Characteristic

C

9EC-C0431-0006

9EC-C0431-0010

9EC-C0431-0016

9EC-C0431-0020

9EC-C0431-0025

9EC-C0431-0032

Order Codes

FMN 4,5 kA

1 pole(Phase-Neutral)

Frequency

(Hz)


Ratedoperational

voltage-Ue (V)

Ratedinsulation

voltage-Ui (V)

Rated impulsewithstand

voltage-Uimp (kV)

230 690 6 50 - 60

Pic-2

Fig-4

Characteristic

GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT PHASE-NEUTRAL MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERSGENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT PHASE-NEUTRAL MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



66

-2006 6/5

General :

Federal Disconnector are manufactured according to IEC

60947-3-standarts, AC22 utilization category and CE norms

between the ranges of 40A- 100A. 2,3 and 4 poles circuit

switches handle mechanism are obtained to separate the

system at the same time.

Pic-3

Order Codes :

Rated ThermalCurrent Ith (A) 1 Pole

40

63

80

100

9RA-00201-0040

9RA-00201-0063

9RA-00201-0080

9RB-00201-0100

2 Poles

9RA-00202-0040

9RA-00202-0063

9RA-00202-0080

9RB-00202-0100

3 Poles

9RA-00203-0040

9RA-00203-0063

9RA-00203-0080

9RB-00203-0100

4 Poles

9RA-00204-0040

9RA-00204-0063

9RA-00204-0080

9RB-00204-0100

Technical Characteristic:

FMSType

1,2,3,4

AC-22A

40,63,80,100

500 V

6

50/60

12xIn

20xIn

10.000

10,16,25,35

Numbers of Pole

Class

Rated Current

Rated Operational Voltage

Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage - Uimp

Rated Frequency

Short-time withstand current

Short - circuit making capacity

Mechanical life

Min. connection cross-sections

A

V

kV

Hz

A/1s

A/1 s

Operation

mm2

In

Ui

Ith

GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT DISCONNECTORGENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT DISCONNECTOR



DIMENSIONS OF PHASE-NEUTRAL, MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER, CIRCUIT SWITCH

-2006 6/6

DIMENSIONS OF PHASE-NEUTRAL, MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER, CIRCUIT SWITCH

75

4 5

54

36

18

2

7 7

724 poles3 poles

2 poles

1 pole

FMS Type :

FMB Type :

67

4 5

7 7

18

36

54

724 poles

3 poles

2 poles

1 pole

FMN Type :

FMH Type :

66

4 5 9 0

35.5

72

54

36

18

4 poles

3 poles

2 poles

1 pole

67

8 2

4 5

18



77

-2006 7/1

FK3/FK30

Residual Current Circuit BreakerResidual Current Circuit Breaker

General Information About Residual Current Circuit Breakers

Technical Table and Control Diagram About Residual Current Circuit Breakers

Dimensions of Residual Current Circuit Breakers

2

3

4

CONTENTSCONTENTS

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERRESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER



This resistance value decreases to 1 k Ohm and 480 Ohm at

humid and wet ambience respectively.

Voltage-Time curves for normal, humid and wet ambiences

are given below. (Fig-2).

-2006 7/2

Normal condit ions : 50 V= 25 mA x 2 kΩ

Humid ambiences : 25 V= 25 mA x 1 kΩ

Wet ambiences : 12 V= 25 mA x 480 Ω

A B C

1 2 3 4

10000

5000

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

100,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 500010000

mACurrent intensity passing through humanbody • 1 (mA)

Current passing time t (s)ms

1. Unfeeling

2. Feeling

3. Nonpermanent damage

4. Permanent

* According to IEC 60947-1, residual current passing through humanbody-current’s passing time

A : Opening relayM : Opening coi l

RA : Protection earthRB : Operating earthT : Test button

L1

L2

L3

N

N 1 3 5

M

A

N 2 4 6

RARB

Effect of voltageSafety curve of voltage indicates the border between life and

death. The maximum value of this voltage that is not harmful

for humanbeing is calculated, by accepting the threshold value

of residual current as 25 mA and according to the ambienceof the changing interior resistance of humanbody.

The interior resistance of an adult person is 2 k Ohm at normal

conditions.

0,01

0,05

0,10

0,50

1,00

5,00

10,00Wet Humid Normal condi tion

Time(s)

10 12 20 30 50 70 90 200 300 400 500

Voltage (V)

T

Fig-2

Fig-1

Fig-3

As seen from Fig-2, the maximum voltage value to be contacted

continuously of a person without death risk is 50V. At the same

conditions, when a person exposes to 100V, 0.3 second is the

duration to be contacted without death risk.

GeneralThe increase of the usage of the electrical instruments in

houses, businesses and industries is rised the occurrence risk

of residual currents. Nevertheless, every year many people

are being a victim of electrical accidents and 40% of fires arebeing occurred as a result of wrong usage of electrical energy.

Because of this fact, the usage of the residual current protection

equipments is compulsory in many countries. Federal Residual

Current Circuit Breakers are manufactured according to TS

EN 61008 standards and CE certificate. The effects of electric

current and voltage on humanbeing and the limited values are

given below.

Effect of high currentElectric current passes through humanbody whoever contacts

with electrical apparatus existing an insulation fault or conductors

under direct energy. The importance of the hazard is dependent

several factors when a current passes through the body.

The main of these;- Current value

- Duration of passing of current

- Way traced in body

The effects of current passing through humanbody;1-10 mA : Having pins and needles

10 mA : Beginning of convulsion

20-30 mA : Convulsion of diaphragm

(Suffocation risk)

70-100 mA : Beginning of heart trembling

500 mA : Stopping of heart and death

As seen, even the small amount of current causes the stoppingof heart and at last the death of humanbeing.

30 mA residual current passing through humanbeing exposing

to electricity is the limited value according to IEC 60947-1 for

respiration and blood circulation. (Fig-1).

Operating principle

As seen from Figure-3, phase or phases and neutral are passedinside a very sensitive toroidal transformer. Everything is normal

if there is no difference between incoming and turning current

and a standstill case of magnetic flux flows on the opening

relay. If a difference current occurs, the magnetic flux on the

opening relay breaks down due to inductive voltage in the

secondary winding of the current transformer. The latch tied to

a natural magnet with a spring is released and gives an opening

signal to opening coil mechanically, with the strength of the

spring. The opening coil interrupts the energy opening the

main contacts. The duration of this operation is less than 30

ms. This simple mechanism is very important for human safety

and so, should be a high-tech product, and the circuit breaker

should repeat the same operation thousand times without

mistake.

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERSGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS



77

7/3-2006

Controlling diagram of Residual current circuit breakers:

Type

Rated residual current (mA)Rated current (A)

Rated voltage (V)Closing breaking capacity (Im/I∆m), (A)Short circuit current with (Inc/I∆c), (A)Frequency (Hz)Number of poleWeight (gr)Standards

3040, 63

240/415630300050-602, 4250 (2P), 470 (4P)IEC 61008-1, BS 4293, CE

300

FK3 FK30

Fig-4

Type

2

4

Number of Pole

30

300

30

300

Nominal ResidualCurrent (mA)

40

63

40

63

40

63

40

63

Rated Current

9FA-H0002-0040

9FA-H0002-0063

9FA-Y0002-0040

9FA-Y0002-0063

9FA-H0004-0040

9FA-H0004-0063

9FA-Y0004-0040

9FA-Y0004-0063

Order Code

2 pole

4 pole

YES

YES

YES YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

The circuit breaker triped

The circuit breaker reset

Can the

circuit breaker be

reset?

Can

the circuit breakerbe reset ?

Can

the circuit breaker

be reset ?

Can

the circuit breaker

be reseted ?

Temporary breakdown, connection

and connected devices shall be checked

for insulation against the earthing

(Including neutral line)

Fuses are put on circuit one by one.

If circuit breaker get reset position.

There is an insulation break-down in circuit.

To find the reason of the break-down

all equipments are cut off from circuit

Circuit breaker should be reseted again.

There is an insulation fault between

phase and earth or neutral and earth

in connection between circuit breaker

and fuse panel board.

Circuit breaker isbroken-down

The conductors that in the exit

of circuit breaker including

neutral conductors must be

separated to each other.

Broken down is in constant of electrical

installation. To determinate place of

broken-down, the conductors which in

distributions box should be separatedfrom circuit and tested insulation.

Fuses which after

circuit breaker shall

be cut off circuit

Device which cut off in circuit shall

be connected again one by one.

Devices is broken-down

Which circuit breaker tripped.

TECHNICAL TABLE AND CONTROL DIAGRAM ABOUT RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERSTECHNICAL TABLE AND CONTROL DIAGRAM ABOUT RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS



-2006 7/4

68

50

7 1

3 6

4.5

25

35

9 0

4 5

68

50

7 1

3 6

4.5

25

70

9 0

4 5

FK3 - FK30 Type (2 pole) :

FK3 - FK30 Type (4 pole) :

DIMENSIONS OF RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERSDIMENSIONS OF RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS



LOW VOLTAGECURRENT TRANSFORMERS

FAT - 30B

FAT - 40L

FAT - 100L

FAT - 40

FAT - 100

FAT - 130L

FAT - 30

FAT - 60

FAT - 130

General and Technical Information About Low Voltage Current Transformers

Technical Characteristics of Low Voltage Current Transformers

Dimensions of Low Voltage Current Transformers

2

4

5

8/1

LOW VOLTAGECURRENT TRANSFORMERS

-2006

88

L.V. Current TransformersL.V. Current Transformers

CONTENTSCONTENTS



General :

Current transformer is a very useful device because it convertshigh AC current to small easily manageable values.Current transformers consist of primary winding, secondary

winding , magnetic core and insulated body. If currenttransformers have no bus bar, they are manufactured withoutprimary winding. Instead of this, it is possible to constituteprimary winding by passing conductor or busbar insidetoroidal core of transformer.Federal current transformers are produced according to IEC185 and IEC 60044-1 standards and CE certificate.Furthermore, the secondary terminals are under a transparentseable cover. Low voltage current transformers aremanufactured as of two types for measuring and protection.

8/2

3

5

%50

3

5

%120

3

5

5P

10P

Compound error for

rated current %

±1

±3

±60

—

±18

—

5

10

Measuring current transformers :

Measuring current transformers are constructed to feed onother low voltage apparatus such as measuring instruments,relays, watt-hour meters (kW meter) and these type of current

transformers are mainly used 0.5 and 1 class to transfer thecurrent from highest rated current to rated secondary current.

Protection current transformers :

Protection current transformers are constructed to feed theprotection relay. These type of current transformers aremainly used class 3. (Customer supplied when required.)

Current errors and phase shift in protection current transformers: (Fault conditions)

Current errors and phase shift in measuring current transformers :

Accuracy

class

Accuracy

class

± percentage ratio of current error for

rated current percentage

Minute Centiradian

permissible ratio error ± at

various percentage of

rated secondary current

± phase shift in various percentages

of rated secondary current

-2006

Accuracyclass

permissible ratio error ± at variouspercentage of rated secondary current

% 20

0,2

0,35

0,75

1,5

0,1

0,2

0,5

1,0

% 5

0,4

0,75

1,5

3,0

% 100

0,1

0,2

0,5

1,0

% 120

0,1

0,2

0,5

1,0

% 5

15

30

90

180

% 20

8

15

45

90

% 100

5

10

30

60

% 120

5

10

30

60

% 5

0,45

0,9

2,7

5,4

% 20

0,24

0,45

1,35

2,7

% 100

0,15

0,3

0,9

1,8

% 120

0,15

0,3

0,9

1,8

± phase shift in various percentages of rated secondary current

Minute Centiradian

Current errors and phase shift in measuring current transformers

GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERSGENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS



88

8/3

Ratio error of current transformers can be guaranteed between

100% and 120% of rated current.

Error class can be 2-3 folding, especially the value of the

under half rated current at the application, load current can

be taken into considerat ion between In-1,2In.

Technical characteristics :

Maximum rated voltage : 720 V

Typical application : Indoor

Continuous operating current : 1,2xInTest voltage per minute : 3 kV

Security coefficient : <5

Rated primary current (In) : 30A....3000A

Rated secondery current : 5 A

Operating frequency : 50-60 Hz

Operating temperature : -5/+45°C

Thermal rated current : Ith= 100xIn

(for FAT-30B type Ith=60xIn)

Dynamic rated current : Idyn= 2,5xIth

The matters which should be taken intoconsideration during the mounting of currenttransformer :

• Do not open the secondary circuit, when a current is

available in primary.

• Current transformers are produced as singlephase

• Resistance of current transformer is very low, so that

secondary winding of current transformer can be operated

as a short-circuit, when required in test operation. Otherwise,this condition causes high voltage and can be dangerous

during usage.

Additional load due to copper cables:

Device power which are connected to currenttransformers :

Ammeter

Wattmeter

Cosϕ meter

kWh-meter (active and reactive)

Reactive power control units

Overload relays

Inverse current relays

Secondary thermal relays

0,7 ... 1,5

0,2 ... 5,0

2,0 ... 6,0

0,4 ... 1,0

0,5 ... 1,0

0,2 ... 6,0

2,0

7,2 ... 9,0

Power (VA)Devices

Power losses calculation of cable:

Example: Load connected to current transformer is oneactive and reactive kWh-meter with 4 m and 2,5 mm2 cableis 1+1+1,43 = 3,43 VA. So it is necessary to use 5 VA currenttransformer.

1 m.

2 m.

3 m.4 m.

5 m.

6 m.

7 m.

8 m.

9 m.

10 m.

Power losses (VA) at secondery current 5A.

10,0 mm2

0,09

0,18

0,270,36

0,44

0,54

0,63

0,71

0,80

0,89

6,0 mm2

0,15

0,30

0,450,60

0,74

0,89

1,04

1,19

1,34

1,49

4,0 mm2

0,22

0,45

0,670,89

1,12

1,34

1,56

1,79

2,01

2,24

2,5 mm2

0,36

0,71

1,071,43

1,78

2,14

2,50

2,86

3,21

3,57

P=Sx56

(VA)

= cable length of secondary side (m)Isn = seconder rated current (A)S = cross section of cupper cable (mm2)P = power losses (VA)

Cable (Cu)

Isn x 2

magnetic saturation

rated load

1/4 load (M5)1/4 load (M2)

overload range(measuring)

overloadrange

(protection)

rated current

full load(M2)

M5 M5

10P510P10

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

-14-15

F%

Fi %

(+)

1,0 1,2 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 9,0 10,0 1N00502

c u r r e n t f a i l u r e

(-)

M5

Fig-1 Showing ratio error for measuring and protection current transformer at multiples rated current

-2006

GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERSGENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS



8/4 -2006

Note : Federal mark LV current transformers have a sealing feature.

5 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 10

5 , 105 , 10

5 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 10

5 , 105 , 10

30/540/550/560/575/580/5

100/5125/5150/5

200/5250/5

FAT-30BFAT-30BFAT-30BFAT-30BFAT-30BFAT-30BFAT-30BFAT-30BFAT-30B

FAT-30BFAT-30B

0,600,600,600,600,600,600,600,600,60

0,600,60

9GA-00∆5-00309GA-00∆5-00409GA-00∆5-00509GA-00∆5-00609GA-00∆5-00759GA-00∆5-00809GA-00∆5-01009GA-00∆5-01259GA-00∆5-0150

9GA-00∆5-02009GA-00∆5-0250

FAT - 30B

WITH BUSBAR

WINDOWS TYPE

Ø30Ø30Ø30Ø35Ø35Ø35Ø35Ø35Ø35

0,380,380,380,600,600,600,600,600,60

5 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 10

5 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 105 , 10

300/5400/5500/5200/5250/5300/5400/5500/5600/5

FAT-40FAT-40FAT-40FAT-40LFAT-40LFAT-40LFAT-40LFAT-40LFAT-40L

9GC-00∆5-03009GC-00∆5-04009GC-00∆5-05009GK-00∆5-02009GK-00∆5-02509GK-00∆5-03009GK-00∆5-04009GK-00∆5-05009GK-00∆5-0600

FAT - 40 FAT - 40L

WINDOWS TYPEBusbar Dimensions: 80 x 30, 100 x 10 mm. for FAT100

80 x 30, 100 x 20 mm. for FAT 100L

FAT - 100LFAT - 100

WINDOWS TYPE

Ø105

Ø105

Ø105

Ø135

Ø135

Ø135

Ø135

Ø135

Ø135

Ø135

1,50

1,50

1,50

1,50

1,50

1,50

1,50

1,50

1,50

1,50

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

1500/5

2000/5

2500/5

3000/5

4000/5

1500/5

2000/5

2500/5

3000/5

4000/5

FAT-130

FAT-130

FAT-130

FAT-130

FAT-130

FAT-130L

FAT-130L

FAT-130L

FAT-130L

FAT-130L

9GN-00∆5-1500

9GN-00∆5-2000

9GN-00∆5-2500

9GN-00∆5-3000

9GN-00∆5-4000

9GM-00∆5-1500

9GM-00∆5-2000

9GM-00∆5-2500

9GM-00∆5-3000

9GM-00∆5-4000

FAT - 130 FAT - 130L

WINDOWS TYPE

10 , 15

10 , 15

10 , 15

15

Busbar Dimensions: 60 x 20 mm.

Ø40

Ø40

Ø40

Ø40

0,60

0,60

0,60

0,60

10 , 15

10 , 15

10 , 15

15

600/5

750/5

800/5

1000/5

FAT-60

FAT-60

FAT-60

FAT-60

9GD-00∆5-0600

9GD-00∆5-0750

9GD-00∆5-0800

9GD-00∆5-1000

FAT - 60

Ø23

Ø23

Ø23

Ø23

5

5 , 10

5 , 10

5 , 10

-

-

5 , 10

5 , 10

100/5

150/5

200/5

250/5

FAT-30

FAT-30

FAT-30

FAT-30

WINDOWS TYPE Busbar Dimensions: 30 x 10 mm.

0,60

0,60

0,60

0,60

9GB-00∆5-0100

9GB-00∆5-0150

9GB-00∆5-0200

9GB-00∆5-0250

FAT - 30

Class:1Class:0,5

Ratedcurrent(A)

Type Rated power (VA) Weight

(kg)

Order codes

∆

For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B

For 5VA : 2

For 10 VA : 4

For 15 VA : 5

Rated power (VA) Cable

(max) mm.

Weight

(kg)Class:1Class:0,5

Ratedcurrent(A)

Type

Order codes

∆

For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B

For 5VA : 2

For 10 VA : 4

For 15 VA : 5


(max) mm.

Weight


Ratedcurrent(A)

Type

Order codes

∆

For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B

For 5VA : 2

For 10 VA : 4

For 15 VA : 5


(max) mm.

Weight


Ratedcurrent(A)

Type

Order codes

∆

For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B

For 5VA : 2

For 10 VA : 4

For 15 VA : 5


(max) mm.

Weight


Ratedcurrent(A)

Type

Order codes

∆

For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B

For 5VA : 2

For 10 VA : 4

For 15 VA : 5


(max) mm.

Weight


Ratedcurrent(A)

Type

Order codes

∆

For class 0.5: A

For class 1 : B

For 5VA : 2

For 10 VA : 4

For 15 VA : 5

Busbar Dimensions: 40 x 10 mm.

Busbar Dimensions: 110 x 60 ; 2(110 x 20) mm.

for FAT130 135 x 40 mm. for FAT 130L

Ø60Ø60Ø60Ø60Ø60Ø60Ø60Ø80Ø80Ø80

Ø80Ø80Ø80

0,700,720,800,830,941,101,160,900,900,90

0,901,001,00

15151515151515101010

101010

15151515151515101010

101010

1200/51250/51500/51600/52000/52500/53000/5500/5600/5750/5

800/51000/51500/5

FAT-100FAT-100FAT-100FAT-100FAT-100FAT-100FAT-100FAT-100LFAT-100LFAT-100L

FAT-100LFAT-100LFAT-100L

9GE-00∆5-12009GE-00∆5-12509GE-00∆5-15009GE-00∆5-16009GE-00∆5-20009GE-00∆5-25009GE-00∆5-30009GL-00∆5-05009GL-00∆5-06009GL-00∆5-0750

9GL-00∆5-08009GL-00∆5-10009GL-00∆5-1500

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS



DIMENSIONS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

8/5-2006

FAT - 30

FAT - 30B

FAT - 40

FAT - 60

FAT - 40L

(*) Busbar connection apparatus

is delivered in the box.







With bar:

Installation screws (M8x20) which

are used on the busbar are delivered

with the current transformers.

1 6 . 5

1 0 3 . 5

2

118

4 3 .

5

8 7

48

6

4 8

5 5

7 1

8 7 .

5

59

8

87.5

1

1

2 1

58.5

87

4 3 .

5

4 3 .

5

1 6 .

5

1 0

4

Ø 2 3 . 6

3 1

(*)

58.5

4 8

5 6

5 7

6

4 1 .

5

1 0 .

7 5

45

78

4 1

4 1

1 7

9 9

Ø 3 1(*)

45

4 2

5 6

5 7

6

7540

9 9

1 1

42

(*) Ø

3 5

4 2 .

5

4 2 .

5

1 4

7 5

6 0

40

6

2 1

42

103.5

61 5 6

5 6

1 2 7 .

5

1 5 .

5

Ø 4 6

(*)

4 4 .

5

5 5 .

5

5 7 .

5

42

6

DIMENSIONS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

88



8/6 -2006

FAT - 130

FAT - 100

FAT - 130L

FAT - 100L









3 2

1 0 .

5

80.5

146.5

101 6 8

1 5 5

7 2

1 5

Ø 6 2(*)

80.5

4 4

5 4

5 7

6

1 3 6

3 2

102.5

80

(*)

2 2

Ø 8 1

6 0 .

5

6 0 .

5

1 5

132.5

8 2

7 0

80

8 7 .

5

6

1 9 9

1 1 0

6 0

(*)

9 2 .

5

9 2 .

5

110

100

14

170

Ø 1 0 5

4 1

100

5 6

7 0

6

1 7 0

4 2

135

100

(*)

7 8

7 8

1 4

170

Ø 1 3 5

100

7 0

8 1

8 3

6

DIMENSIONS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERSDIMENSIONS of LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS



99

CAM SWITCHES

ON-OFF Switches Change Over Switches Star Delta Starters

Ammeter

Switches

Motor Reversing

Switches

Voltmeter

Switches

-2006

General and Technical Information About Cam Switches

Types of Cam Switches

Dimensions of Cam Switches

2

3

4

9/1

CAM SWITCHES

Cam SwitchesCam Switches

CONTENTSCONTENTS



-2006 9/2

Cam switches are composed of identical contact bearings arranged

in a row on a mile. Cam switches are used in motor connections,

panelmeter switching, control and distribution panels. Federal

cam switches are manufacturing according to IEC 60947-3 / EN60947-3 standards and CE certificate.

Cam switches are manual operated switches. Contactor and

relays are used in controlling medium and high powered motors,

but controlling low power motors is made by cam switches as

they are simple and economic.

Cam switches have two, three or four silver coated contacts in

each section and cam switches can be used in different controlling

operations by increasing the number of sections. As the camshafts

make the contacts work at the same time, contolling of all circuits

or phases can be done safely at the same time without any delay.

General :

General Table :

ON - OFF Switches :

Rated Thermal

Current Ith (A)

Number of

Pole - StagesFront Plate Connecting

Diagram

Order Codes

FCS1

FCS2

101620253263

9TO10∆000◊◊

9TO20∆000◊◊

0 1

3

1 Pole - 1 Stage

2 Pole - 1 Stage

3 Pole - 2 Stages

4 Pole - 2 Stages

Type

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8Stage 1 Stages 2

∆ Number of Pole, Front Plate, ◊ Rated Thermal Current, for example :

Back Plate

Switch

Front Plate

Handle

Picture-1

9TO103020020

ON-OFF Switches

3 Pole

20A

ONOF F

AC1

AC15

AC21A

AC23A

AC3

220-240 V

380-440 V

660-690 V

220-240 V

380-440 V

660-690 V

220-240 V

380-440 V

660-690 V

220-240 V

380-440 V

660-690 V

220-240 V

380-440 V

660-690 V

1p

3p

1p

3p

1p

3p

1p

3p

1p

3p

1p

3p

Rated ThermalCurrent Ith (A)

Type FCS1

Rated Insulation VoltageUi (V) 50-60 Hz

FCS2

Rated Operating Current (A) for

Rated Operating Power (kW) for

Protection Fuses gL/gG (A)

Cam SwitchesIEC 60947-3

EN 60947-3

63

40

25

20

12

-

63

11

15

15

25

15

25

5.5

11

10

18.5

10

18.5

80

63

690

32

20

13

10

6

-

32

3.5

7.5

3.8

10

13

5.5

3

5.5

3.5

7.5

5

10

40

32

690

25

690

25

16

10

7.5

5

-

25

3

6

5

10

5

10

3

5

5

8

5

8

32

20

13

8

6

4

-

20

2.5

3.7

3.7

7.5

4

7.5

2.2

3

3

5.5

3

5.5

25

20

690

16

10

6

5

4

-

16

2

3.7

3

6

3

6.5

2

3

3

5

3

5.2

20

16

690

10

6

4

3

2

-

10

1.25

2.2

2

3.7

2

3.7

1

1.8

2

3

2

3

16

10

690Utilization

classes

GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT CAM SWITCHESGENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT CAM SWITCHES

0 1 ONOF F

1 2



99

-2006 9/3

TYPES of CAM SWITCHESTYPES of CAM SWITCHES

Change Over Switches :

Rated Thermal

Current Ith (A)

Front Plate Connecting Diagram Order Codes

FCS1

FCS2

1016

20

25

32

63

9TK10∆0400◊◊

9TK20∆0400◊◊

∆ Number of Pole, ◊ Rated Thermal Current

1 2

4

0

Number of

Pole - Stages

1 Pole - 1 Stage

3 Pole - 2 Stages

Voltmeter Switches :

Function Number of

Stages

Front Plate Connecting

Diagram

Order Codes

FCS1 20

9TV123V10020

9TV143V20020

3 Phase

3 Wires

VOLTMETER

O

TR RS

ST

VOLTMETER

OFFRS

ST

RN

SN

TNTR

Star Delta Starters :

Rated Thermal

Current Ith (A)

Number of

Pole - Stages


Diagram

Order Codes

FCS1

16

259TS10∆0500◊◊

1357

9111315

2468

10121416

L1

1V

1W2V

2W

1U2U

L2

L3

0 1 2

0

Motor Reversing Switches :


Diagram

Order Codes

FCS1

10

16

20

25

9TE10∆0600◊◊

OFFFWD REV

∆ Number of Pole, ◊ Rated Thermal Current

V

W

R

S

T

FWD OFF REV

U

3 Pole - 4 Stages

Number of

Pole - Stages

1 Pole - 2 Stages

3 Pole - 4 Stages

Type

Type

Type

Type

2 Stages

3 Stages3 Phase

4 Wires

Rated Thermal

Current Ith (A)

Rated Thermal

Current Ith (A)

1 3 5 7 9 11

2,4 6,8 10,12

2 Stage 3 Stage1 Stage

R-S

T --------

S --------

R --------

N --------

S-TT-R R-N S-N T-NO

V2

V1

5

7

9

11

V

4

8

O RS ST TR

R 2

4

T 6

S 8

1

3

5

7

V1

V2 V

Ammeter Switches :

FCS1 20 9TA10303700203 Pole - 4 Stages

Function Number of

Stages


Diagram

Order CodesType

Rated Thermal

Current Ith (A)

6

5

FWD OFF REV

R

6

5

S

V1

V2

7

0

S

T R



-2006 9/4

General dimensions of FCS1 type switches :

General dimensions of FCS2 type switches :

Dimensions of FCS1 type voltmeter - Ammeter switches :

Number of Stages

FCS1 Body Lenght (L1)

FCS2 Body Lenght(L2)

1

31.5

49

2

41

70.5

3

50.5

92

4

60

113.5

Cam Switches Body Lenghts :

DIMENSIONS of CAM SWITCHESDIMENSIONS of CAM SWITCHES



CONTENTS

H .C. Contactors

SemiconductorContactors

Contactors forCapacitor Switching

CONTACTORS

H .C. Contactors

300 - 2500 A

For 5 - 70 kVAr

6 - 300 A

Contactors forCapacitor Switching

SemiconductorContactors

15 - 30 A

-2006 10/1

General Information About Contactors

Selection of Contactors for Utilization Categories

Technical Characteristics of Contactors

Selection of Contactors According to Electrical Life

Table of Cross Section for Contactors

Utilization Categories for Contactors

Contactors Damages and Repairs

Underload Average Motor Currents

Contactor for Capacitor Switching

Order Codes of Contactors

Dimensions of Relevant Contactors

General Information About Semiconductor Contactors

General Information and Dimensions of Semiconductor Contactors

General Information About AC/DC High Current Contactors

Technical Characteristics of AC/DC High Current Contactors

AC-DC Connection Diagrams of High Current Contactors

Dimensions of AC/DC High Current Contactors

2

3

4

6

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

CONTENTS

CONTACTORS

1010

ContactorsContactors



GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CONTACTORS

-2006

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CONTACTORS

General :

Contactors provide remote control of primarily electric motorsand compensation & heating systems by cable. They protectthe instruments and foundations against overload currents

by using thermal relays.Federal contactors are manufactured in according to IEC60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1 standards and CE certificate. Mainand auxiliary contacts, coil and auxiliary contact blocks areeasily installed and removed. FC type contactors have coilwith three points, thus connection flexibility has been provided.The coils of contactors are safely controlled between 0,8 and1,1 times of their rated coil voltage. They operate at fullperformance in the ambient temperature of -5 0 C and +550 C. The ability of assembling contactors to rails provides agreat facility during installation. The ingredient of the materialprovides a resistance to an insulation voltage of 1000V.

General Characteristics :

Acceptable continual thermal current Ith:

Acceptable thermal current current is the biggest test valuethat will be used at increasing temperature for the IEC 60947-4-1. This test is bases on current applications of 8 hours PVC

- Motor rated power (kW) ,- Operating voltage- Type of operating motor

10/2

1-Contactor should have the high current value withoutbeing exposed to and damaged or boiling. This belongs tothe quality of contactors. (Contact surface quality and weldtechnology) Especially at AC-3 and capacitor command,selectivity of contactor is very important.2-Current which passes through the contacts causes warmingwhen the contactor is closed. This warming is limited withthe standarts. For IEC 60947-4-1 when continual thermalcurrent (Ith) is passed through the main contacts, maximumincreasing temperature should not exceed 65K.3-While the contactor is cutting the current, electrical arcoccurs between the seperated contacts. Arc is the result ofthe thermal impression of electron and ion current whichbroke off the contact material. Temperature of the arc reaches

to thousands of degrees and this temperature is too highfor metals and insulators which are used at contact makingand cutting cells. Therefore, arc should end as soon aspossible. For this reason separators are used inside ofcontactors.

Selection of contactors :

Most important point at the selection contactors is to knownload and retain instantaneous load characteristic magnitude.To select contactors the following criterion should be takeninto consideration.Rated operating voltage (Ue),Rated operating current (le),Rated coil voltage,Rated breaking current (lc),

b. Slip-ring motors :Contactors are to be selected individually for stator and rotor.Selection of stator contactor is made in compliance with Iththermal current. Selection of rotor contactor duty is characterizedby making, operating (starting, regulating) insulating (earthing),type of application (intermittent or final contactor) condition.

insulated copper conductors which are passes throughcontactor terminal. In this case changing temperature ofcontactor terminals (∆Q) should not exceed 65K.

Closing Capacity :

Closing Capacity is the current value which the contactorclose the contacts without any damaging. Power factorr andfrequency of closing are the factors that effect to capacityof closing. According IEC 60947-4-1 standards for AC3utilization class, if le is the maximum motor operating currentclosing capacity should be 10xle.

Electrical Life :

Electrical Resistance is the number of maximum opening –closing when the load currents passes through contactor’spoles without needed care. Electrical Resistance is deter-minated at the result of the tests which are made at variousclasses.AC 1: Resistive loadsClosed current= broken current=leAC 3: squirrel-cage or slip-rings asynchronous motorsworking discontinuous and applications of current brake.Closed current=broken current= 6le.

Mechanical Life :Maximum opening and closing numbers which only feedthe coil, without passing the current through from the mainpoles of contactor, determinate the mechanic resistance ofcontactor.

Breaking Capacity :Breaking Capacity is the current value which contactorcontacts and arc extinguisher cells are broken successfullyand undamaged when the voltage value increases, breakingcapacity dicreases. At IEC 60947-4-1 for AC 3 using class,If le is the motor current, breaking capacity should be 8 x

le. Breaking capacity = 8 x le.

c. Contactors for starting AC motors :At the direct running: Selection is made according to motornominal power for AC3 class. At the star-delta runningwithout load: Star contactor breaks approximately 1/3 ofrated current of motor and depends on motor is 1/3 of rated

motor power. Main line and delta contactors are connectedin series to motor winding and during the running are pulled1/ of motor power. Thus motor power is 1/ of motorpower.

For selection a contactor it is essential to determine below:- Rated operating voltage (Ue) ,- Rated operating current (le),- Motor starting current (lc=m x le),- Operating frequency (K)

- Number of operation.

Selection contactor for motors:

a. Squirrel-cage asynchronous motors :Above mentioned technical data for selection contactorshould be retained and :

SELECTION OF CONTACTORSSELECTION OF CONTACTORS



SELECTION of CONTACTORS for UTILIZATION CATEGORIES

In the contactor the resistive loads have negligible effectduring the making and breaking of the current , becauseonly rated current passes through it.The heating of thecontactor increases as the number of switching (opening-closing) increases.In other words the heating of the contactorincreases as the number of switching. For this reason it issuggested that during calculation to use the rated currentvalue less than the actual value. Usually the feeding of singlephase in heating circuit for 3 phase contactor, it is necessaryto use 2 or 3 pole in series. If 3 poles are in series, the rated

operational current should be 1.6Ie and if 2 poles are inseries, it should be 2Ie.

When operating on a DC circuit, elimination of arc is moredifficult than operating on an AC circuit. Selection ofcontactor, it is essential to know the current and breakingvoltage as well as the time constant (L/R) of the power circuitcontrolled by the contactor. For information, conventionalvalues of t ime-constants are stated as fol low:- Non-inductive load such as resistance furnaces=(L/R)=1ms- Shunt motor = L/R = 7,5 ms- Series motor = L/R = 10 ms- Electro magnet = L/R = 300 msImportant criteria at the switching of inductive DC load istype of voltage (omic or inductive) and switching frequency.

SELECTION of CONTACTORS for UTILIZATION CATEGORIES

-2006

- Type of lamps

- Connection

- Whether capacitor switching (with or without factor correction)

Installation of incandescent lamp, when contactor energises,

the operating current reaches to 15 fold of rated current. Sothe rated current is equal to the breaking current.

Capacitor switching is so important at discharge and

fluorescant lamps.

Current is pulled 2 fold of operating current at a high pressure

mercury vapour lamps approximately 5 minutes for previously

heating time. Previously heating time is 10 minutes for halogen

and sodium vapour lamp.

f. Capacitor switching application :

While switching on a capacitive circuit, a high frequency(1...15hz) and large transient current peaks areproduced.Switching of capacitor for a single or one of thecapacitor banks are different from each other.Step by step“switching on” operation is more difficult for contactor thancapacitor bank. Because during this operation for capacitorbank, compensated current occurs. For this reason selectingof a suitable contactors the compensating current must betaken into consideration for 50kVAr and above,and for less than 50 kVAr can be omitted.

10/3

e. Resistive loads :

d. Selection contactors for DC circuit :

However star-delta contactors are used to limit a startingmoment, during the whole load starting. So after starting, deltacontactor pulls high current in the result of making switchingat the low speed of motor. So that star contactors are to be

selected as an equal of motor power.The table below mentions the contactors type depending onthe on-load and thermal current range factor.

Selecting contactor for squirrel-cage asynchronous

Main contactor current=IeDirect running

Normal star-deltarunnig

With impedancerunning

With autotransformerrunning

Main contactor : 0,58 IeDelta contactor : 0,58 IeStar contactor : 0,58 IePassing contactor : 0,30 Ie

Main contactor : IeStarting contactor : 0,7 Ie

Main contactor : IeTransformer contactor : IeStar contactor : 0,5 Ie

g. Lighting installation applications :Time after time strike voltage and current can force the contactorat the applications of lighting. When selection of contactors,

the following criterias should be taken into consideration :

Selecting a contactor at the direct starting squirrel-cage asynchronousmotors :

Selecting a contactor with star-delta starting squirrel-cage asyncronous motors :

FC09DFC09DFC09DFC09DFC09DFC09DFC09DFC09DFC12DFC18DFC25DFC25DFC32DFC40DFC50D

FC65DFC80DFC95DFC115DFC150DFC220DFC260DFC260DFC300D

Threephase 380/400V

kW In (A) 0,37

0,55

0,75

1,1

1,5

2,2

3

4

5,5

7,5

9

11

15

18,5

22

3037

45

55

75

90

110

132

160

1,03

1,6

2

2,6

3,5

5

6,6

8,5

11,5

15,5

18,5

22

30

37

44

6072

85

105

138

170

205

245

300

Termal RelayRange

(A)1 - 1,6

1,25 - 2

1,6 - 2,5

2,5 -4

2,8 - 4

4,5 - 6,3

5,5 - 8

7 - 10

9 - 12,5

14 - 20

17 - 22

20 - 25

23 - 32

30 - 40

37 - 50

55 - 7063 - 80

75 - 105

95 - 125

100 - 160

125 - 200

200 - 315

200 - 315

250 - 400

Suitable FEDERALContactor

380/400V

7,5 9

11

15

18,5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110

132

160

200

220

15,518,5

22

30

37

44

60

72

85

105

138

170

205

245

300

370

408

kW In (A)

7-109-12,5

11-16

14-20

20-25

23-32

30-40

38-50

48-57

57-66

63-80

75-105

100-160

100-160

125-200

200-315

200-315

Termal RelayRange

(A) Line DeltaStar

FC12DFC12D

FC12D

FC18D

FC18D

FC32D

FC50D

FC50D

FC50D

FC65D

FC80D

FC150D

FC150D

FC220D

FC220D

FC260D

FC260D

FC12DFC12D

FC12D

FC18D

FC18D

FC32D

FC40D

FC50D

FC50D

FC65D

FC80D

FC150D

FC150D

FC220D

FC220D

FC260D

FC260D

FC09DFC09D

FC09D

FC09D

FC09D

FC18D

FC25D

FC32D

FC32D

FC50D

FC50D

FC80D

FC80D

FC150D

FC150D

FC220D

FC220D

Suitable FEDERAL Contactor

1010



-2006

Type

Utility Class : AC3Ie max Ue 440 VUtility Class : AC1Ie max 40 °C

220 / 230 V

380 / 400 V

415 V

500 V

660 / 690 V

220 / 230 V

380 / 400 V

415 V

500 V

660 / 690 V

Motor Control

3 ~ AC3

Startup

Stopping

Auxiliary contact number

Amm2

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

kW

Note: Auxiliary contact blocks are fixed to front side of contactor. NO : Normally open contact NC : Normally closed contact

Connection conductor cross sectionØ max

ContactorsTS EN 60947-4-1

IEC 60947-4-1EN 60947-4-1

FC - 25DFC - 18DFC - 12DFC - 09D

Rated insulation voltage - Ui (a.c.) 50-60 Hz V

Rated impulse withstand voltage - Uimp kV

Motor Control

3 ~ AC4

Startup

Direction changingStepping

32

50

10

1000

8

7,5

15

15

18,5

18,5

3,7

7,5

7,5

9

11

0,55

FC - 32D

Weight

1 NOor 1 NC

1 NOor 1 NC

1 NOor 1 NC

1 NOor 1 NC

1 NOor 1 NC

25

40

10

1000

8

5,5

11

11

15

15

3

5,5

5,5

7,5

10

0,52

18

32

6

1000

8

4

7,5

9

10

10

1,5

3,7

3,7

5,5

7,5

0,345

12

25

4

1000

8

3

5,5

5,5

7,5

7,5

1,5

3

3

4

5,5

0,33

9

25

4

1000

8

2,2

4

4

5,5

5,5

1,1

2,2

2,2

3

4

0,33

A(Ith)

FC - 09M

9

16

2,5

690

8

2,2

4

4

4

4

1,1

2,2

2,2

2,2

2,2

0,16

FC - 06M

6

16

2,5

690

8

1,5

2,2

2,2

3

3

0,75

1,1

1,1

1,5

1,5

0,16

1 NOor 1 NC

1 NOor 1 NC

Easily changeable coils

FCC-D2 FCC-D4FCC-D0

Auxiliary contact blocks (Front Assembling)1. NO contact number

2. NC contact number

FCB-F20FCB-F02FCB-F11

FCB-F40FCB-F31FCB-F22FCB-F13FCB-F04

Auxiliary contact blocks (Side Assembling)1. NO contact number

2. NC contact number

FCAB-F11FCAB-F20FCAB-F02

Mechanical lock

10/4

Connection terminal tightening torque Nm 10,5min. max. min. max. min. max. min. max. min. max. min. max.

10,5 1,51 1,51 1,51 21,2min. max.

21,2

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTACTORSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTACTORS



-2006 10/5

40

60

25

1000

8

11

18,5

22

22

30

4

9

9

11

15

1,12

50

80

25

1000

8

15

22

25

30

33

5,5

11

11

15

18,5

1,13

65

80

25

1000

8

18,5

30

37

37

37

7,5

15

15

18,5

22

1,14

80

125

50

1000

8

22

37

45

55

45

9

18,5

18,5

22

25

1,37

95

125

50

1000

8

25

45

45

55

45

11

22

18,5

22

25

1,38

115

200

95

1000

8

30

55

59

75

80

15

25

30

33

45

2,4

150

200

95

1000

8

40

75

80

90

100

18,5

30

33

40

55

2,4

FC - 40D FC - 50D FC - 65D FC - 80D FC - 95D FC - 115D FC - 150D

1 NO+ 1 NC

1 NO+ 1 NC

1 NO+ 1 NC

1 NO+ 1 NC

1 NO+ 1 NC

220

300

185

1000

8

60

110

116

132

160

30

50

50

60

80

7,2

FC - 220D

260

300

185

1000

8

80

140

140

180

200

40

65

65

80

100

7,3

FC - 260D

300

350

185

1000

8

90

160

160

200

250

45

75

75

95

120

7,4

FC - 300D

FCB-F20FCB-F02FCB-F11

FCB-F40FCB-F31FCB-F22FCB-F13FCB-F04


FCC-D6 FCC-D8 FCC-D10

min. max.

4,53,5min. max.

4,53,5min. max.

4,53,5min. max.

12,54min. max.

12,54min. max.

106min. max.

106min. max.

1410min. max.

1410min. max.

1410

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTACTORSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTACTORS

1010



-2006 10/6

TABLE OF CROSS SECTION FOR CONTACTORS

Connection Cross Section :

1...4

1...4

1...2,5

2...6

2...10

1...2,5

2...10

1...2,5

2,5...25

1...2,5

4...50

4...95

4...185

1...6

1...6

1...2,5

1,5...6

1,5...6

1...2,5

1,5...10

1...2,5

2,5...25

1...2,5

4...50

4...95

4...185

1...4 + 1...4

1...4 + 1...4

1...2,5 + 1...2,5

1,5...6 + 1,5...6

1,5...6 + 1,5...6

1...2,5 + 1...2,5

4...10 + 4...10

1...2,5 + 1...2,5

2,5...16 + 2,5...16

1...2,5 + 1...2,5

4...35 + 4...35

4...50 + 4...50

4...95 + 4...95

1...6 + 1...6

1...6 + 1...6

1...2,5 + 1...2,5

1,5...6 + 1,5...6

1,5...6 + 1,5...6

1...2,5 + 1...2,5

2,5...10 + 2,5...10

1...2,5 + 1...2,5

4...16 + 4...16

1...2,5 + 1...2,5

16...35 + 16...35

16...50 + 16...50

4...95 + 4...95

8

8

8

10

10

8

12

8

—

8

—

—

32

Min. and max.

connection

cross section

(mm2)

FC - 09D

FC - 12D

FC - 18D

FC - 25D

FC - 32D

FC - 40DFC - 50DFC - 65D

FC - 80D

FC - 95D

FC - 115D

FC - 150D

FC - 220DFC - 260DFC - 300D

mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm

MainContact

AuxiliaryContact

—

Selection of contactor according to electrical life (for Ue ≤ 440 V AC-3 class) Power according to operating voltage at 50 Hz

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1,5

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Breaking current

M i l l i o n o p e n i n g - c l o s i n g

F C - 0 9 D

F C - 1 2 D

F C - 1 8 D

F C - 2 5 D

F C - 3 2 D

F C - 4 0 D

F C - 5 0 D

F C - 6 5 D

F C - 8 0 D

F C - 1 1 5 D

F C - 0 6 M

F C - 0 9 M

F C - 9 0 D

F C - 1 5 0 D

120 150 200 250

F C - 2 2 0 D

F C - 2 6 0 D

F C - 3 0 0 D

SELECTION OF CONTACTORS ACCORDING TO ELECTRICAL LIFESELECTION OF CONTACTORS ACCORDING TO ELECTRICAL LIFE



AC (Alternative Current) DC (Direct Current)

AC - 12: Control of resistive loads and solid state loads with

isolation by optocouplers

AC - 13:Control of solid state loads with transformer isolation

AC - 14:Control of small electromagnetic loads (<72 VA)

AC - 15:Control of a.c. electromagnetic loads (<72VA)

DC - 12: Control of resistive loads and solid state loads with

isolation by optocouplers

DC - 13:Control of d.c. electromagnets

DC - 14:Control of d.c. electromagnetic loads having economyresistors in circuit

-2006 10/7

Kind ofcurrent

AC

DC

Utilizationcategories

AC - 1

AC - 2

AC - 3

AC - 4

AC - 5a

AC - 5b

AC - 6a

AC - 6b

AC - 8a

AC - 8b

DC - 1

DC - 3

DC - 5

DC - 6

Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces

Slip-ring motors : Starting, switching off

Squirrel-cage motors : Starting , switching off motors during running (1)

Squirrel-cage motors :Starting, plugging, inching

Switching of electric discharge lamp controls

Switching of incandescant lamps

Switching of transformers

Switching of capacitor banks

Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor (2) control with manuel resetting of overload releases

Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor (2) control with automatic resetting of overload releases

Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces

Shunt motors : Starting , plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of dc motors

Series motors : Start ing , plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of dc motors

Switching of incandescent lamps

Typical Applications

a. Utilization categories for contactors according to IEC 60947-4-1 :

AC4 class :This category includes the squirrel-cage or slip-ring motorsdiscontinuous operating and opposite current braking.Contactor opens motor’s rated current at going forwardcurrent which is greater than 5..7 times and closes. At lowspeed, breaking occurs in hard situation. Examples, pressingmachines, wire and cabin machines, discontinious operatingset counters, mettallurg, rising, electrovalves…etc.Determination of correct utilization category and making theselection suitable for this category, is the most importantpoint for contactor to work healthy.

Utilization Categories :

The international standard for contactors which is known asIEC 60158-4-1 today leaves its position to IEC 60947-4-1standard. Utilization categories clarifies the closing current,

breaking current and power factor for the application. ACutilization categories are revelant with alternative current,DC utilization categories are revelant with direct current. AtIEC 60158 standart AC1, AC2, AC3, AC4 is clarified at IEC60947-4-1 standarts AC5 to AC8 new classes stage lightinglamps, transformers, capacitor units and coolingcompressors.

AC1 class :This category includes alternetive current loads which hasmin %95 power factor. We can show heating applicationsas an example to this.

AC2 class :This category includes going forward, braking with theopposite current and steply operating of slip-ringasynchronous motors. At closing time a current which is 2,5times bigger than rated current passes through the contacts.Contactor should break the rising voltage mostly at an equalvalue to standart voltage at opening time. We can showraising and metallurgy applications as an example for this.

AC3 class :

This is the widest spread application class. This categoryincludes the squirrel-cage asynchronous motors which aren’tput into use when they are operating after going forward.

On closing time motor rising current which is greater 5…7times than motor’s rated current passes through thecontactor’s contacts. Contactor will open the rated currentwhich motor pulls at opening time. Voltage between thiscontactor poles is %20 of the nominal voltage.This is aneasily breaking position. We can show all standard squirrelcage and slip-ring asynchromous motor’s stator and statorcommand, lifts, escalators, conveyors, pumps, ventilations,mixers, air conditioners, refrigerators, valves as examples.

b. Utilization categories for contactors in controlling circuits according to IEC 60947-5-1

Descriptions :

For rapid breaking motor is fed by reverse current or is changed rotating direction by inverting the points of two phase.

Stepping operating : Motor should be operated intermittently.

UTILIZATION CATEGORIES for CONTACTORSUTILIZATION CATEGORIES for CONTACTORS

1010



-2006 10/8

(1) The test can be realized by incandescent load.

(2) 6P (W) value is supplied by ampric formula and P = 50 W or (6P) = 300ms represent DC magnetic loads.

Test characteristics table for AC-DC application according to standard using class :

Opening Closed Opening

Acceptable operating according to using class

AC - 1

AC - 2

AC - 3

AC - 4

AC - 5a

AC - 5b

AC - 14

AC - 15

Category

DC - 1DC - 3

DC - 5

DC - 6

Category

DC - 13

Category

for all of values

for all of values

Ie<17A

Ie≥17A

Ie<17A

Ie≥17A

for all of values

for all of values

for all of values

for all of values

Ie

for all of valuesfor all of values

for all of values

for all of values

Ie

for all of values

Ie

0,95

0,65

0,65

0,35

0,65

0,35

0,45

(1)

0,3

0,3

L/R (ms)

12

7,5

(1)

T0,95

6P (2)

1

1

0,17

0,17

1

1

1

1

1

1

Ur/Ue

11

1

1

Ur/Ue

1

1

2,5

1

1

6

6

2

1

1

1

Ic/Ie

12,5

2,5

1

Ic/Ie

1

Ic/Ie Ur/Ue Ie

0,8

0,65

0,45

0,35

0,45

0,35

0,45

(1)

0,7

0,3

L/R (ms)

12,5

15

(1)

T0,95

6P (2)

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,1

1,1

U/Ue

1,051,05

1,05

1,05

U/Ue

1,1

1,5

4

10

10

12

12

3

1,5

6

10

I/Ie

1,5 4

4

1,5

I/Ie

1,1

I/Ie U/Ue

0,8

0,65

0,45

0,35

0,45

0,35

0,45

(1)

0,7

0,3

L/R (ms)

12,5

15

(1)

T0,95

6P (2)

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,05

1,1

1,1

Ur/Ue

1,051,05

1,05

1,05

Ur/Ue

1,1

1,5

4

8

8

10

10

3

1,5

6

10

Ic/Ie

1,5 4

4

1,5

Ic/Ie

1,1

Ic/Ie Ur/Ue

Normal operating

Closed

0,95

0,65

0,65

0,35

0,65

0,35

0,45

(1)

0,3

0,3

cosØ

12

7,5

(1)

cosØ

6P (2)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

U/Ue

11

1

1

U/Ue

1

1

2,5

6

6

6

6

2

1

6

10

I/Ie

12,5

2,5

1

I/Ie

1

I/Ie U/Ue

Contactor damages and effects of these damages :

There can be damages when the contactors are not usedaccording to technical datas and then failures begin tooccur at the feeding system.

Reasons of Probable Cancellation of Contactors :

Generally, contactors are the devices, which do not damageeasily. If the selection is made correctly and operatingconditions are not out of order, contactor can make millionstimes opening and closing safely. The reasons of thecancellation and their solutions are given below.- Excessive length of cable of command circuit (coils) cancause some problems. Voltage is low during the long cables

and this reason makes the closing difficultly and over bigcross-sectioned cable capacitance obstruct opening.Generally advised cable cross-section and length arementioned in catalogues. If the command circuit is longerthan the advised value, higher contactor and more lowercoil voltage, resistance or inductive impedance connectionshould be used.- Dirt or foreign particles in the contactor, hard atmosphereconditions and corrosion can obstruct the closing operationof contactor. If we face a problem like this, contactor shouldbe cleaned, appropriately. Then the circuit should be checkedand modified for a more protective environmend for thecontactor. If there is a factor damaging the conduction, itshould be removed.

Changing the coil :

New coil is put on by pulling up screws, which are takingplace on both sides of the contactor, separating the upperparts and taking the coil out off its socket. Much attentionshould be paid to placing on its spring that at the bottomside, during re-assembling.

Contact melting loss of obvious switch device is generallyrelated to opening current and contact lives which are shownin diagrams. (Page 6) Using fields of contactors operatingthe motors. Different operating types of motors are classifiedaccording to IEC 60947-4-1 standard.

Contact life related to operating current :

- Events that can cause the contactor’s noisy operation isdust and having foreign particles in the air space… etc,unsuitable voltage and frequency. Also defect of the nucleussurface because of long time operation.To obstruct all these, we should provide the clearness ofthe nucleus face and (if needed) coil changing should bemade for voltage and frequency.

for all of values

for all of values

Ie<100A

Ie≥100A

Ie<100A

Ie≥100A

for all of values

for all of values

for all of values

for all of values

Ie

for all of valuesfor all of values

for all of values

for all of values

Ie

for all of values

= Before closed voltage

= Rated operating voltage

= Input point voltage after opening

U

Ue

Ur

I

Ie

Ic

= Closed current

= Rated operating current

= Opening current

cosØcosØ cosØ cosØ

UTILIZATION CATEGORIES for CONTACTORSUTILIZATION CATEGORIES for CONTACTORS

CONTACTORS DAMAGES AND REPAIRSCONTACTORS DAMAGES AND REPAIRS



UNDERLOAD AVERAGE MOTOR CURRENTS

-2006 10/9

UNDERLOAD AVERAGE MOTOR CURRENTS

R N

Monophase motors

Three phase motors

Single Phase Motors Three Phase Motors With 4 Pole 50/ 60 Hz.

R TS N

1,8

2,753,54,46,1

8,711,513,514,520

2732353952

647585103113

126134150170182

195203240

260295

325356420425450

472483520578595

626

700800826900

94898099011001150

11801250———

——

kW HP 240 VA

kW HP 220-240 V

A380 VA

415 VA

440 VA

500 VA

660 VA

1000 VA

220 VA

0,37

0,550,751,11,5

1,82,2344,4

5,25,5677,5

0,5

0,7511,52

2,53456

77,58910

3,9

5,26,69,612,7

15,718,624,329,634,7

39,842,244,549,554,4

3,6

4,86,18,811,7

14,417,122,227,131,8

36,538,740,845,450

0,37

0,550,751,11,5

2,233,745,5

7,59101115

18,522253033

3740455155

596375

8090

100110129132140

147150160180185

200

220250257280

295300315335355

375400425445450

175500

0,5

0,7511,52

3455,57,5

101213,51520

2530354045

5054607075

8085100

110125

136150175180190

200205220245250

270

300340350380

400410430450480

500545580600610

645680

1,03

1,622,63,5

56,67,78,511,5

15,518,5202230

3744526068

72798598105

112117138

147170

188205242245260

273280300333342

370

408460475510

546565584620636

670710760790800

850900

—

—22,53,5

56,57,58,411

1417—2128

3540475560

66718090100

105115135

138165

182200230240250

260270280320325

340

385425450475

500510535550580

610650690730740

780820

0,99

1,361,682,373,06

4,425,777,17,910,4

13,716,9—20,126,5

32,83945,351,558

6467768390

97109125

131146

162178209215227

236246256289295

321

353401412450

473481505518549

575611650680690

730780

1

1,211,522,6

3,855,96,59

1213,91518,423

28,53339,44550

5560657580

8589105

112129

143156184187200

207210220254263

281

310360365400

416420445472500

527540574595608

645680

0,6

0,91,11,52

2,83,84,44,96,6

8,910,611,51417,3

21,325,430,334,639

4244495761

666982

8698

107118135140145

152159170190200

215

235274280305

320325337355370

395410445455460

485515

0,4

0,60,7511,3

1,92,533,34,5

677,5912

14,517202325

2830333840

434553

5765

7178859095

100102115135138

150

160200203220

227230239250262

273288302317320

335350

1010



Fig-3 FC-40DK; FC-65DK; FC-95DK

(R)

L1 L2 L3

T1 T2 T3

A1

A2

Resistance (R)

33

34

13

14

21

22

1L1 3L2 5L3

2T1 4T2 6T3

-2006 10/10

That is why capacitor switching contactors are used andfor this reason the life-time of contactors increase 100%

in comparision with normal contactor.

Example: If electrical life of normal contactor is 100.000 in

max load, electrical life of capacitor switching contactor is

200.000.

Operating principle :When coil of contactor is energized, first contact of passing

block is closed, starting current of contactor is passed

through this contact, approximately after 3 - 5 ms contacts

of passing blocks are opened and rated current of contactor

is carried on main contacts.

Special contactors for switching capacitor :FC-.. DK series contactors are designed only for capacitor

switching. They can be used safely in single step or multiple-

step capacitor banks because of their special design.FC-

DK series contactors have current limiting contact blocks,

so the starting current of capacitor is limited with 80xIn. So

the life time of both capacitor and circuit protection devices

will increase.

Circuit diagram

Why capacitor switching contactor ?As it is known, when the capacitor starts to operate, they

cause a high frequency between 1-15 kHz. and a current

that is 180 time higher than rated current for very short time

period. Shock inductance is to be fixed to each phase to

limit this current. But practically this type of operation isdifficult.

29

50

10

10

20

690

8

200.000

1NO+1NC

0,60

FC - 32DK

23

40

10

7

15

690

8

200.000

1NO+1NC

0,58

FC - 25DK FC - 65DK

43

80

25

15

30

690

8

200.000

2NO+1NC

1,36

72

125

50

30

50

690

8

200.000

2NO+1NC

1,58

FC - 95DK

Contactor forcapacitor switchingIEC 60947-4-1EN 60947-4-1

Contactor type

Rated insulation voltage-Ui (a.c.) 50-60 Hz


Electrical life (ON-OFF)

Auxiliary contact number

Weight

Connection conductor cross sectionØ max

Rated capacitorpower (kVAr)

Q 40 ϒ C

Utilization Category AC-6bIemax Ue 415 V

Rated thermal current (Ith)

A

A

mm2

220/240 V

380/415 V

V

kV

kg

101

200

95

40

70

690

8

200.000

1NO+1NC

2,65

FC - 150DK

CONTACTOR for CAPACITOR SWITCHINGCONTACTOR for CAPACITOR SWITCHING

Fig-2 FC-12DK; FC-18DK; FC-25DK; FC-32DK

(R)

L1 L2 L3

T1 T2 T3

A1

A2

Resistance (R)

33

34

21

22

1L1 3L2 5L3

2T1 4T2 6T3

FC - 40DK

36

60

25

13

25

690

8

200.000

2NO+1NC

1,34

8

25

4

3

5

690

8

200.000

1NO+1NC

0,39

FC12DK

15

32

6

6

10

690

8

200.000

1NO+1NC

0,40

FC18DK



ORDER CODES of CONTACTORS

50/60 Hz

24 V

A5

42 V

B5

440 V

V5

48 V

E5

110 V

H5

220 V

K5

380 V

S5

240 V

R5

415 V

T5

-2006 10/11

ORDER CODES of CONTACTORS

Coil voltages : Coil voltages of contactors are shown in table below.

Example1: For 220 V, 50/60 Hz coil voltage. K5Example2: For AC3 class 32 A, normally closed, coil voltage 48 V 50/60 Hz. contactors: FC - 32DO1 E5.Example3: For AC3 class 95 A, normally 3 closed and 1 opening with auxiliary contact, coil voltage 220 V and 50/60 Hz.

FC - 95D11K5 + FCB-F02

(1) First number shows normally opening contact (NO), second number

shows normally closed contact (NC).

Example;

11 = 1 NO + 1 NC

(2) M : Mini contactor

D : Standard contactor

K : Capacitor switching contactor

Definitions of contactor type code :

Coil voltage value

Number of auxiliary contact (1)

Contactor type (2)

Rated current (AC3)

Federal contactor

Order codes of contactors : Auxiliary contact blocks order code:

FC09 DFC12 DFC18 DFC25 DFC32 DFC40 DFC50 DFC65 DFC80 DFC95 DFC115 DFC150 DFC200 DFC260 DFC300 D

8DD-0000-00098DD-0000-00128DD-0000-00188DD-0000-00258DD-0000-00328DD-0000-00408DD-0000-00508DD-0000-00658DD-0000-00808DD-0000-00958DD-0000-01158DD-0000-01508DD-0000-02008DD-0000-02608DD-0000-0300

FCB-F20FCB-F11FCB-F02FCB-F40FCB-F31FCB-F22FCB-F13FCB-F04

8DD-A0020-00008DD-A0011-00008DD-A0002-00008DD-A0040-00008DD-A0031-00008DD-A0022-00008DD-A0013-00008DD-A0004-0000

Upper MountingType

Order Code

Type Order Code

Spare main contact set order code :

FCC-D2FCC-D4FCC-D6FCC-D8FCC-D10

8DD -C20-00008DD -C30-00008DD -C40-00008DD -C50-00008DD -C60-0000

Type Order Code

Spare coil order code :

Coil operating voltage.


8DD-B0011-00008DD-B0020-00008DD-B0002-0000

Side MountingType

Order Code

Coil operating voltage.

AC-3 Ie (A)

FC06M

FC09M

FC09D

FC12D

FC18D

FC25D

FC32D

FC40D

FC50D

FC65D

FC80D

FC95D

6

9

9

12

18

25

32

40

50

65

80

95

2.2

4

4

5,5

7,5

11

15

18,5

22

30

37

45

kW 400 V Standard Auxiliary Contact

1 NA1 NK

1 NA1 NK

1 NA1 NK

1 NA1 NK

1 NA1 NK

1 NA1 NK

1 NA1 NK

1 NA + 1 NK

1 NA + 1 NK

1 NA + 1 NK

1 NA + 1 NK

1 NA + 1 NK

Order Code

9DM - 103-00099DM - 013-0009

9DM - 103-00099DM - 013-0009

9DD - 103-00099DD - 013-0009

9DD - 103-00129DD - 013-0012

9DD - 103-00189DD - 013-0018

9DD - 103-00259DD - 013-0025

9DD - 103-00329DD - 013-0032

9DD - 113-0040

9DD - 113-0050

9DD - 113-0065

9DD - 113-0080

9DD - 113-0095

9DD - 003-0115

9DD - 003-0150

9DD - 003-0220

9DD - 003-0260

9DD - 003-0300

Type

FC115D

FC150D

FC220D

FC260D

FC300D

115

150

220

260

300

55

75

110

140

160

-

-

-

-

-

FC06M22* 6 2.2 2 NA + 2 NK 9DM -K3 223-0006

FC - 50 D 11 K5

FC09D...FC32D

FC40D...FC95D

9MK-0001

9MK-0002

Type Order Code

Mechanical Lock Order Code :

Compensation Block

Compensation Resistance Blok

8DK-D21-0

8DK-D21-1

Type Order Code

Contactor for Capacitor Switching Accesorries Order Code :

Contactor Type.

Contactor for capacitor switching order code :

AC-6b Ie (A)

FC12DKFC18DKFC25DKFC32DKFC40DKFC65DKFC95DK

FC-150DK

8152329364972

101

5101520253050

70

kVAr 400 V Standard auxiliary contact

1 NO + 1 NC1 NO + 1 NC1 NO + 1 NC1 NO + 1 NC2 NO + 1 NC2 NO + 1 NC2 NO + 1 NC

1 NO1 NC

Order code

9DK- 113-00129DK- 113-00189DK- 113-00259DK- 113-00329DK- 213-00659DK- 213-00959DK- 103-01509DK- 013-0150

Type

1010



DIMENSIONS of RELEVANT CONTACTORSDIMENSIONS of RELEVANT CONTACTORS

-2006 10/12

4 8 .

5

34.5

b

c

a

4 2 . 5

40

b

4 8 .

5

a

c

a

c

b

1 0 5 .

5

30

40

c

a75

b

c 1 3 1

FC150DK Type :230-250

1 2 2

75

90

75

FC40DK/FC65DK/FC95DK Type :

72,5

200-210

1 5 0

75

40

FC25DK / FC32DK Type :

57

40

140-150

1 3

1 -

1 3 6

35

FC12DK / FC18DK Type :

46

34.5

130-140

1

1 7

- 1 2 2

35

Type

FC 09D

FC12D

FC18D

a

80

80

85

b

46

46

46

c

74.5

74.5

74.5

Type

FC25D

FC32D

a

94

94

b

57

57

c

84

84

Type

FC40D

FC50D

FC65D

FC80D

FC95D

a

115

115

115

122

122

b

75

75

75

75

75

c

125.5

125.5

125.5

125.5

125.5

Type

FC115D

FC150D

a

143

143

b

90

90

c

150

150

1 9

7 .

5

44 a

c

b

c

Type

FC220DFC260D

FC300D

a b c

177177

177

140140

140

235235

235



Operating Voltage Un

Peak Voltage

Rated current

Peak current (t=10msn)

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

Reaction period max (ms)

Control Voltage

Control current

Rated capacitor powerOrder code.

400

1200

15

320

-5 ... + 55

-40 ...+100

10

220 V AC, 12- 24 V DC-AC

22

109DK-A0003-0015

400

1200

30

450

-5 ... + 55

-40 ...+100

10

220 V AC, 12- 24 V DC-AC

22

209DK-A0003-0015

FSC15K FSC30K

V

V

A

A

°C

°C

ms

mA

kVAr

The Current impacts are seen on picture 3 are parasites whichare occurred by another capacitor switch on the circuit. Thisparasite is an avoidable. Because, a harmonic current whichoccurs when other capacitor switch on is flowed to parallelcapacitor. As an over current is not flowed on capacitor duringswitch on capacitor in compensation system by semiconductorcontactor, parasites do not occurred on parallel capacitor.

Power electronic components find more using area insteadof mechanical contactor for switch on and off electrical loadwith technology. Switching can be made fastly by semiconductorcontactor. In this way, switch on and off stage is obtained inone period. High power loads as spot welding machine,harbour crane, welding machine, elevator, drill, arc furnaces, impact load, induction furnaces e.t.c are compensated fastlyespecially for automotive, paper, package, food textile, glassand cement sectors.

Current and voltage capacity of power electronic switchcomponents will increase and their price will be cheap withdeveloping of technology. As it is explained below,semiconductor switching has important advantages insteadof mechanic switching.

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTORGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTOR

General :

Fig-1 At the time of switch on compensation capacitor by contactorfor capacitor switching.

I

t

Fig-3 The current flows on compensation capacitor which switchesby contactor for capacitor switching is seen.

I

t

Fig-2 Figure of voltage and current wave on capacitor during theswitch on the same capacitor by semiconductor contactor,

I

t

As it is seen on figure 2, over current does not occur forswitching by semiconductor contactor.

Advantages of Semiconductor Switching.

As it is seen on figure 1.at the time of switch on, peak valueof high current which flows by capacitor is about five timesfrom peak value of nominal current.

-2006 10/13

1010

- Long-life- High reliable.- No corrosion.- No moving part.- No electronic interference.- High switching speed.- High input and output isolation.- Durable for shock and vibration- Switching at phase angle is zero.- No arc during the switching.- No inductance at the control side.- Temporary impulse, peak, flash over at the electronic devicesconnected the same system.



GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTORGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTOR

GENERAL INFORMATION AND DIMENSIONS OF SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTORSGENERAL INFORMATION AND DIMENSIONS OF SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTORS

FCT15K-FCT30K Type:

1 0 0

9 2

, 4

9 0

7 0

, 8

70

55,6

2020 12,6 79,6 51,7

65

8 ,

6

1 3 5

, 2

1 4 3

, 9

1L1 3L2 5L3

2T1 4T2 6T3

At figure 5.current wave figure is shown at the time of switchthe capacitor by semiconductor contactor. As it is seen, anyover current occurred at the time of switch on. Approximatelyduring the 3 periods time is a temporary state which is occurred

for harmonic filter of the circuit. As any over current does notpass on the capacitor like switch on capacitor the circuit, anyparasites occurred on parallel capacitor.

Not : Using of current limited reactor on harmonic filter reactoror nonfilter compensation system ; NH super flink fuse mustbe used for protection.

L1

L2

L3

Fig-6 Connection diagram for one level on compensation systemwith semiconductor contactor.

Fig-4

I

t

Fig-5

I

t

During the capacitor switch on by semiconductor contactora current wave figure is seen at figure 4.The reason of repeatedone after the other current impact as occurred parasite is

contactor contacts are stick each other. Current impact is 10times to nominal current as it is seen at the figure.

-2006 10/14



GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT AC - DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS

-2006 10/15

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT AC - DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS

General :

Federal high current contactors are used safe and reliable

in resistive, inductive and capacitive AC circuits. It is

manufactured in conformity with VDE 0660 standard.

Normally contactors have three poles. On request they can

be produced with 1, 2 or 4 poles.

Federal contactors are designed for AC application only.

Selection of contactors is shown in technical value table for

various usage class and voltage.

Beginning button is fixed to AC circuit. This connection is

shown on the connection diagram. Contactor is not opened

in the event of voltage harmonic in circuit. For example,

voltage should be below 55 V (0.25xUs) for opening

contactor, in the event of control feeding voltage (Us)

220 V. in circuit max 4A (In=1600) current is pulled by

contactor in the entering of circuit. Current is 180 mA

(In=1600A) while contactor in circuit. As it is understood

from this, power consumption of Federal contactor is very

small. And operating noise of coil is very low.Coil and

operating systems are capable to operate in dusty industrial

environments. They are suitably rust proofed.

Coil circuit :

Contact System :

Arc and main contacts are existing in main circuit of contactor.

Previously arc contact is closed at position of closing and

this contact takes instantaneous starting currents whichcould occur on the rated current. After that it is provided

completely touching by closing contacts. Wearing due to

arc will be occur and strike of main contacts to each other

is prevented by means of this closed system. In the position

of opening while voltage of coil is interrupted, previously

main contact will not be damaged in the event of arc.

Auxiliary Contacts :

There are 4 opening and 4 closed auxiliary contacts on the

contactor. 2 opening and 2 closed contacts of them are

used in coil circuit. Other 2 opening and 2 closed contacts

are kept as spare. Depending on request 2 opening and 2

closed contacts can be provided.

By means of electromagnetic blow in contactor, arc which

occurs during the opening is pushed into the arc extinguisher

and extinguishing of arc is provided by arc divider in

extinguisher by dividing the arcs. Due to this reason

contactors should never be operated without installation of

arc extinguisher .

Arc extinguishers :

Advantages:

- Due to twin contact technique, main contacts are saved

from spark errosion during open as well as closing operation

and can have long operating life.

- High current contactors can be used under the hard

conditions with safety, by means of wide arc extinguisher,

magnetic blow and special contact system in comparison

of compact contactors.

- Heating of core is prevented at the high frequency so that

they can be used as a convenient at induction furnace due

to this characteristic.

- There is no noise while in operation.

- Consumption of power is very small. (Consumption of

power is shown at table of technical characteristics)

- High current contactors are not effected from harmonic

voltage.

- Auxiliary contacts are existing. (Depending on request

number of auxiliary contact can be increased)

- Depending on request, mechanical locking can be installed

as a addition to electrical locking.

- Together with these advantages, these products are also

economic.

660 V 3 ~ 220 V –

440 V – 660 V –

R S T N P(N) N(P)

P(N) N(P)P(N) N(P)

Fig-7

Figure of connection at AC-DC circuit :

Figure of connection of contactors below is shown for AC

voltage. Continuously the energy must be gone from upper

terminal in which the extinguishers exist to contactor in order

to push the blowing of electromagnetic in to arc extinguishers.

1010



TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of AC/DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS

NO (10A)

NC (10A)

Pulling

Holding

Depth

Wideness

Height

High Current ContactorIEC 60947- 4

Type

Utilization categoryIe max

Number poles

For capacitor switching circuit


For squirrel-cageasynchronousmotors

3 ~ AC3

Auxiliary contacts

Coil power

consumption

Mechanical life

Dimensions

Weight

220 / 230 V

380 / 400 V

500 V

380 / 400 V

Ui

Us (AC)

Us (DC)

xUs

AC1 (Ith) ≤ 40°C A

quantity

mm2

kW

kW

kW

kVAr

~ V

~ V

– V

~ V

Pcs

Pcs

W

W

Operation

mm

mm

mm

kg

300

1,2,3,4

40 x 5

75

132

180

150

690

24, 48, 110, 220, 240, 380, 415

24, 48, 110, 220, 240, 380, 415

0,72 - 1,1

2

2

800

26

50000

245

462

370

28,6

EC 300

1250

1,2,3,4

2(40 x 10)

370

630

740

450

690

2

2

880

35

50000

245

557

370

44,2

EC 1250

1600

1,2,3,4

80 x 15

470

790

960

525

690

2

2

880

35

50000

245

557

370

44,8

EC 1600

800

1,2,3,4

40 x 12

200

335

450

300

690

2

2

800

26

50000

245

462

370

30,4

EC 800

400

1,2,3,4

40 x 5

110

200

257

200

690

2

2

800

26

50000

245

462

370

29,2

EC 400

630

1,2,3,4

40 x 8

160

280

355

250

690

2

2

800

26

50000

245

462

370

29,8

EC 630

2000

1,2,3

2(80 x 10)

580

980

1190

655

690

4

4

1760

70

50000

500

710

370

88,4

EC 2000 EC 2500

Coil voltage operating range

Control feedingvoltage

2500

1,2,3

2(80 x 15)

730

1230

1490

820

690

4

4

1760

70

50000

500

710

370

89,6

-2006 10/16

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of AC/DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS

Contactors Order Codes :

AC-3 Ie (A)

EC 300

EC 400

EC 630

EC 800

EC 1250

EC 1600

EC 2000

EC 2500

300

400

630

800

1250

1600

2000

2500

132

200

280

325

630

790

980

1230

kW 400 V Standard auxiliary contact

2 NO + 2 NC

2 NO + 2 NC

2 NO + 2 NC

2 NO + 2 NC

2 NO + 2 NC

2 NO + 2 NC

4 NO + 4 NC

4 NO + 4 NC

Order codeType

Us: Control feeding voltage

Note: High current contactors are manufactured standard as a three poles.

: Coil operating voltage. : Number of poles. (1, 2, 3, 4)

9DY- 22 -0300

9DY- 22 -0400

9DY- 22 -0630

9DY- 22 -0800

9DY- 22 -1250

9DY- 22 -1600

9DY- 22 -2000

9DY- 22 -2500

50/60 Hz

DC

24 V

A5

A6

48 V

E5

E6

110 V

H5

H6

220 V

K5

K6

380 V

S5

S6

415 V

T5

T6

240 V

R5

R6

Connection conductor cross section Ø max



AC/DC CONNECTION DIAGRAMS of HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS

-2006 10/17

AC/DC CONNECTION DIAGRAMS of HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS

e01 : 6A fusee02 : 5A fusee2 : Thermal relay contact User’s connection (Stop mechanism)R : Resistance dividing voltage (2200 Ω - 75 W)BD : Bridge diotK : Coil

Connection diagram :

- : Sequence terminals R1=(2200±%5) Ω-75W for - VRN=220 V

- Put the stop button on DC circuit as like the diagram otherwise there will be a delay at opening.

- No.5 and 6 terminals are short-circuited for testing. Users should pay much attention to this item and should make the connection according to diagram.

Connection diagram of mechanicallocking :

6 6 0

Pic-2

Pic-1

3

K

K4

K

K

R

5A

5

1

N

2

6

On

Off

K

R

43

4484

83

3

4

71

72

32

31

BD

e02

95

961

2

e2

e01

Auxiliary contact block connection diagram

e02 3

5

112

11 23 31

24 32

43

44

51

52

63

64

71

72

83

84

4 R

K

Terminal connection diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6

e2

Neutral PhaseON OFF

4

3

95

96

2

1

1010



DIMENSIONS of AC/DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS

-2006 10/18

DIMENSIONS of AC/DC HIGH CURRENT CONTACTORS

EC1250 - EC1600 Type :

Energy input

Ø12.5

14

44

550

14

1 4 5

Assemblyhole

Assemblyhole

86 25

Ø12.5

308

Separators

15

EC2000 - EC2500 Type :

Energy input

Ø12.5

14

44

550

14

1 4 5

Assemblyhole

Assemblyhole

86 25

Ø12.5

308

Separators

642

1 3 0

2 5

Assemblyplate

15

Separators

Energy input

Ø12.5

14

65

170

14

1 4 5

Assemblyhole

Assemblyhole

40 25

435

Ø12.5

EC300-EC400-EC630-EC800 Type :

100 mm.(min)

1 3 8

3 7 0

245

15

100 mm.(min)

500

3 7 0

100 mm.(min)

1 8 0



CONTENTS

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

-2006

General and Technical Information of Thermal Overload Relays

Technical Information and Order Codes of Thermal Overload Relays

Dimensions of Thermal Overload Relays

2

3

4

11/1

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

FTR25 FTR32

CONTENTS

Thermal Overload RelaysThermal Overload Relays

1111



GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYGENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

So, the limited opening current is Ia = (1,05-1,2 ) Ie. Besides

of that, the hot relay should open within 2 min. at 1,5 Ie. And

the cold relay should open in 2 sec. or 5 sec. depended on

delay time at 7,2 Ie.

The average value of opening characteristic of heated relay by

adjustment current is 10%-30% of cold relay. The values depend

on intensity of limited current is 1,05-1,2 times of adjustment

current.

The opening time of the hot relay decreases from 5 min. to 2 min.

at the1,5 Ie as seen at fig. 1. The limited opening current values

related to the values of opening current of the thermal overload

relay are written according to IEC 60947-4-1.The cold thermaloverload relay shouldn’t open within 2 hours at 20 oC ambition

temperature and 1,05 Ie. And the hot condution should open

within 2 hours at 1,2 Ie.

GeneralThermal Overload Relays connected with a contactor breaks

the circuit in order to isolate the motor in case of over load or

phase is cut out. The contactor with a thermal overload relay

becomes a much useful device. That protects the consumeragainst the over current, also protects the contactor against

the effects of over heat. FEDERAL thermal overload relays are

manufactured according to IEC 60947-4-1 and CE standards

up to 32 A compensated at ambition temperature.

Each phase of thermal overload relay is related to over current

angle. Bimetals pushes the differential bar and opens the

circuit when it is heated. Only two bimetals operate when one

phase is cut out and the over current angle operates much

rapidly due to over current. The mechanism of the thermal

overload relay compensates changes of ambition temperature

and prevents the relay against effects of temperature changes.

The average value of opening characteristic of thermal over

current relay under hot condition operation is smaller than cold

condition. In other words, cold relay open later than hot relay

approximately ratio at the determined current. That is important

about safety for the relay and protected device. The relay

under hot condition and over loaded 1,5 times should break

circuit within 2 min. for motors according to IEC 60947-4-1.

d

s

Cold

LimitCurrent

120

50

20

10

5

2

1

10

5

32

11 1,5 2 5 10

Hot

xIe

t

Fig.1 : Opening –Closing Characteristics of thermal overcurrent relay under hot and cold condition operation.

-2006 11/2

OpeningCurrent

Delay Time Operating

Condition Description

1,05 Ie

1,20 Ie

1,50 Ie

7,2 Ie

> 2 hrs

< 2 hrs

< 2 min.

> 2 sec.

Cold

Hot

Hot

Cold

Limit Opening Current

Limit Opening Current

-

-

2

1

40

20

10

4

2

2

4

1

1

20

10

40

0.8

0.8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20

123

Time

d

s

h

Class 10 A

xIe

t

Fig.-2: The Current time curve of the thermal over current relay.1. 3 phases balanced operation (cold)2. 2 phases balanced operation (cold)3. 3 phases balanced operation (hot)

Table 1. Thermal opening current and delay times of overcurrent relay loaded at 20 oC as every equaled three currentway.

If 3 poles thermal overload relay loads as 2 poles, the openingtime will rise 10%, if it loads as 1 pole the time will rise 20%.The limited current values and opening characteristic aredetermined at 20 oC ambition temperature. If the ambitiontemperature changes, the opening time will change. As a resultof that, the limited current value decreases then the relay sendscommand signal early. For example, the limited current at 50oC is lower than at 20%. But, as ambition temperaturedecreases, so current temperature is needed, for the sameopening time at 20 oC. If the relay and protected device suchas motor, operated at the same ambition temperature and iftheir heat was equal under definited condition, the operatingcharacteristic of the relay’s depending on ambition temperaturewould be advantage. But reality of these conditions is notpossible every time for especially remote control systems andenclosed relays. But in this situation, the protected device andrelay may not operate at the same ambition temperature.



GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY and ORDER CODES

Auxiliary Contacts:Opening contact, acts two contacts, one of them closes andthe other one breaks. Breaking contact breaks the energy bycutting out the motor contactor. The closing contact can beused for the different purpose.

Reset Button:The reset button is used as automatic or manual. If it is automatic( A ), the thermal relay will put into use the contactor afterbimetals getting cold by automatically. If it is manual ( M), youshould press to reset button after bimetal getting cold in orderto the contactor is put in to use.

-2006 11/3

Specifications- 2 size from 0,1 A than 32 A

- 1 NO+1NC auxiliary contacts

- Easy assembly- Bimetal opening mechanism

- Phase fault protection

- Indicator

- Adjustment of instant current

- Automatic or manual reset button

- Test and stop button

- The motor starts cannot effect it due to opening class

- Can be assembled on DIN rail.

TypeCurrent AdjustmentOpeningRated Insulation Voltage (Ui)Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage ( Uimp)Max. Operation AltitudeHeating CompensationOperation Frequency.Auxiliary Contacts1NO+1NC

(A)

Class (A)

(V)

kV

m

Hz

Ie 220V

AC15 380V

FTR250.1 ... 251069062000-25...+5550/602.731.58

FTR3223 - 321069062000-25...+5550/602.731.58

Only being at same ambition temperature relay and motor isnot enough to safety protection. The opening limited heatingof relay should be equal to permitted heating of motor. Generally,it is not possible to have both of these conditions at the sametime. So that, adjustment current of the relay should be adjustedcontinuously, considering changing of temperature. Thermalover current relays are connected with a heating compensationbecause of the changing temperature. So, the limited openingcurrent is ( 1,05 –1,2 ) Ie at ambition temperature between-25 to +55 C. And the adjustment is not needed.

IEC 947-4-1IEN 60947-4-1CE

Motor consumes much current when one phase is cut out or

one fuse breaks, than normal operation. The phase fault

protection of the thermal relay is put into use and the contactor

is no longer to be in use in order to the motor not to burn.

1,5

1,4

1,3

1,2

1,1

1,0

0,9

-25 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 55

Closed

Open

Ambition temperature

Limited compensation values

x I e

Ambition temperature

Fig. 3: Heating Compensation.

Technical Specifications

FTR32

1.8-2.5

2.2-3.2

2.8-4

3.5-5

4.5-6.3

5.5-8

7-10

9-12.5

11-16

14-20

17-22

20-25

23-32

Order Code

gG

6

10

10

16

16

20

20

25

35

50

50

63

63

Short CircuitProtection

ContactorType

FTR25

Type

9DD-T0001-0025

9DD-T0001-0032

9DD-T0001-0040

9DD-T0001-0050

9DD-T0001-0063

9DD-T0001-0080

9DD-T0001-0100

9DD-T0001-0125

9DD-T0001-0160

9DD-T0001-0200

9DD-T0001-0220

9DD-T0001-0250

9DD-T0002-3200

aM

4

6

6

8

8

12

12

16

20

25

25

30

40

Order Codes

Test ButtonThe motor contactor can be tested whether it is in use or notby pressing the test button.

Stop ButtonThe stop button can be used for operation motor contactor ifthere is an emergency situation.

GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY and ORDER CODES

CurrentA

Current adjustment

1NO auxiliary contact

Contactor

1 NC auxiliary contact

Pic.-1

Test buttonReset button

Limited opening currents

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC09D ... FC32D

FC25D ... FC32D

1111



DIMENSIONS of THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

-2006 11/4

DIMENSIONS of THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

FTR32 :

9 3

6 9

63

7 0

56

FTR25 :

6 4

7 9

5 6 .

5

60 45



1212

MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH

General and Technical Information About Motor Protection Switches

Selection of Motor Protection Circuit Breakers

Technical Characteristic of Motor Protection Switches

Accessories of Motor Protection Switches

Dimensions of Motor Protection Switches

FMK

12/1

MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH

2

2

3

3

4

-2006

Motor Protection SwitchMotor Protection Switch

CONTENTSCONTENTS



12/2

General :

-2006

FEDERAL FMK 25 type motor protection circuit breakerswith thermal and magnetic short-circuit release are designedmainly to protect three-phase induction motors.Advantages of FMK 25.

- Compliance with EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-4-1, VDE 0660and CE certificate.- Reliable protection in case of overloads and short circuits.

Selection Of Motor Protection Circuit Breakers

Technical Data :

Fig-1 Time-current curve (For 20 °C)(Current as a multiplier of the set current)

- Simple and fast mounting by snap fitting on 35 mm widemounting rail; fixing with two screws is also possible if aspecial adapter is used.- It is convenient to mount into a distribution box.

- Numerous accessories make the application field widerand enable all demands of users.

Standard motor powers

kW

1000

500

200

100

50

20

105

2

1

0.5

0.2

0.1

0.05

0.02

0.01

0.005

0.002

0.0011 2 4 6 8 10 20 50 100

xIe

O p e n i n g t i m e ( s e c . )

Single-phase

220 V230 V240 V

0,06...0,09

0,12

0,18...0,25

0,37

0,55...0,75

1,1...1,5

2,2

3

3 Phase

220 V230 V240 V

0,06

0,09

0,09...0,12

0,18...0,25

0,37

0,55...0,8

1,1...1,5

1,5...2,5

3...4

5,5

5,5...7,5

0,02

0,06

0,09

0,12

0,18...0,25

0,37...0,55

0,75...1,1

1,1...1,5

2,2...2,5

3...4

5...7,5

9

11...12,5

380 V400 V415 V

500 V

0,06

0,12

0,25

0,37

0,55...0,8

1,1

1,5...2,2

3

4...5,5

7,5...9

11...12,5

15

600 V690 V

0,06

0,09

0,18

0,25

0,37...0,55

0,75...1,1

1,5

2,2...3

4

5,5...7,5

11

15

18,5

A

Setting ranges

of thermal

overload release

0,1...0,16

0,16...0,25

0,25...0,4

0,4...0,63

0,63...1

1...1,6

1,6...2,5

2,5...4

4..6,3

6,3...10

10...16

16...20

20...25

EN 60947-4-1,IEC 60947-4-1

VDE 0660, CE

100000 operation

-25...+50 °C

-25...+40 °C

250 g

IP 20

IP 55

690 V

6 kV

25 A

100000 operation

690 V

0,75...4 mm2

500 V

6 A

3,5

2

1,56 A (gL, gG)

0,75...2,5 mm2

General

Standards

Mechanical life

Ambient

temperature

Weight (~)

Protection

class

Main circuitsRated insulation voltage Ui

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

Thermal current Ithmax = Iemax

Electrical life (AC 3 and le)

Utilization category : AC 3

Terminal capacity

Auxiliary switch PS

Rated insulation voltage Ui

Thermal current Ith

Rated operational current Ie

at utilization category

AC 15

Short-circuit protection - max

Terminal capacity (1 or 2 conductors)

No box

In box

No box

In box

230 V

400 V

500 V

GENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHESGENERAL and TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES



1212

12/3-2006


Note : Our products are being calibrated to 40 °C. On request of customer, this value can be changed.

Connection Diagram

Accessories

Accessory name : Auxiliary switchWeight : 35 g

Accessory name : Under-voltage releaseWeight : 65 g

Accessory name : Shunt releaseWeight : 65 g

Accessory name : Emergency stop push-button

Weight : 35 g

Type : FMK NAT

Order code : 8LA-D0000-0000

Accessory name : Enclosure

Weight : 240 gType : FMK 55 ENC

Protection degree : IP 55

Order code : 8LA-E0000-0000

Contact position

2NO

1NO

1NC

1NO+1NC

Tip

FMK F-20

FMK F-10

FMK F-01

FMK F-11

Order Code

8LA-A0020-0000

8LA-A0010-0000

8LA-A0001-0000

8LA-A0011-0000

Type

FMK DGB-24

FMK DGB-48

FMK DGB-110

FMK DGB-220

FMK DGB-240

FMK DGB-380

FMK DGB-415

Operating Voltage (50 Hz)

24 V

48 V

110 V

220 V

240 V

380 V

415 V

Order Code

8LA-B0000-0024

8LA-B0000-0048

8LA-B0000-0110

8LA-B0000-0220

8LA-B0000-0240

8LA-B0000-0380

8LA-B0000-0415

Type

FMK A-24

FMK A-110

FMK A-220

FMK A-240

Operating Voltage (50 Hz)

24 V

110 V

220 V

240 V

Order Code

8LA-C0000-0024

8LA-C0000-0110

8LA-C0000-0220

8LA-C0000-0240

Type

FMK 25-0,16FMK 25-0,25FMK 25-0,4FMK 25-0,63FMK 25-1FMK 25-1,6FMK 25-2,5FMK 25-4FMK 25-6,3FMK 25-10FMK 25-16FMK 25-20

FMK 25-25

Currentsettingrange

(A)

0,1...0,160,16...0,250,25...0,40,4...0,630,63...11...1,61,6...2,52,5...44...6,36,3...1010...1616...20

20...25

9LA-00000-00169LA-00000-00259LA-00000-00409LA-00000-00639LA-00000-01009LA-00000-01609LA-00000-02509LA-00000-04009LA-00000-06309LA-00000-10009LA-00000-16009LA-00000-2000

9LA-00000-2500

Order Code

Mag.tripcur.(A)

1,92,64,4

81119304269

110210220

330

Short-circuit breakingcapacity Icu = Ics =Iq (kA)

220-

240 V

380-

415 V

500 V 660-

690 V100100100100100100100100100100

66

6

100100100100100100100100100

644

4

100100100100100100

3333

2,52,5

2,5

1001001001001001002,52,52,52,5

22

2

Max. front protection fusegL, gG (A) (for I>Icu)

230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V

8080

80

808080

80

253550506363

63

202535353550

50

1 3 5

2 4 6

2 Poles

1 3 5

2 4 6

3 Poles

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 Poles

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHESTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES



-2006 12/4

Motor protection switch :

Auxiliary switch :

Enclosure :

Emergency stop push-button :

45

8 0

4 38

73.5

83

4 5

41.5

26.5

8 0

77

4 5

9

41.5

2 4

66

3 0

1 5 Ø 2

5

R99

3 1 °

71.530

7 .

5

3 4

30

4 8

1 5

16

5

8

5

4

Installation screw dia M4

1 3 5

80 95.5

60

55

5 2 .

5

Ø 1 6 39

1 8 .

5

DIMENSIONS of MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHESDIMENSIONS of MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES



1313

Phase Protection and Time Relays

Counter and Thermostat

RELAYS

-2006

Motor Protection, Phase Sequence and Liquid Level Relay

Motor Phase Protection Relay

Phase Sequency and Motor Protection Relay

Time Relays

FT 60 Time Relay Operating Ways

Counters

Thermostats

Dimensions of Relays

2

2

3

3

4

5

5

6

13/1

RELAYS

Phase Protection and Time Relays

Counter and Thermostat

FMFS MTPR1 FSMK FT-30 FT-60

FDT72 FDT96FS72

CONTENTSCONTENTS



All phases of voltage measures as notr. During this time, if itnotices more than any turned to arranging value at the end ofthe time over, than it switch of the exit relay.It protectived the motor, phase breaking is decreasing drop involtage and assist the voltage cases.

-2006 13/2

FMFS control relay which manufactured as plenty functionsprovided below mentioned functions.

General :

1. Voltage imbalance, breaking the phase :

Relay controls the phase sequence. If it perceives any mistake,it switches off the exit relay. It protectives the system againstto the phase sequences.

2. Phases sequence control :

3. Liquid level control :

Pic-1FMFS motor protection, phase sequence and liquid level relay

Protection for the failure of motors which are created by thephase protection function that mentioned as below.

General : Technical Characteristics :

The motor will be switched off if it is senses 2 or 1 phase forany reason.

1. Phase breaking :

Notr phase voltage unbalanced % 20 (depended by % 40) ifit is over the lever that the motor take out the circuit.

2. Unbalanced voltage :

Correct Connection :

Pic-2MTPR1 Motor phase protection relay

Technical Characteristics :

Operating voltage : 380 V AC 50 HZ

Relay contacts : 1 NO , 1 NC

Contact power : 250 V / 5A AC

Warning : Normally burning, extinguishing,led, during the failure

Assembling shape : Perpendicular in the panel or to do

terminal ray.

Working temperature : - 10°C/+ 60°C

Delaying time : 0 – 5 sn.

Unbalanced voltage : Adjustable (max. % 20)

Order code : 9 HC. A0000 – 0000

Fig-1

SSR+

Min

Max

K1

0

I

MaxMinTSR

Time

Gain%

SSR+N 1 2 3

K1

R

S

T

N

A1

A2

M

3


Fig-2

K1

0

K1

A1

A2

M

3

1

2 3

21 3

Normal

NRST

NTSR

Relay, which controls the liquid sequence by the problar cases,

when the liquid sequence decreases to the min. level then it

opens the exit relay. For opening of the relay again, it should

be react to the max.sequence. If there will not be liquid level

control SSR+min. and max. tip then it should short circuit.

Time Button: If FmFS perceives the voltage failures, exit relayfor off term of waiting.

% Button : FMFS determines the max. % value of any phase

which turns to 220V. (min.= 176 V, max. = 264 V)

Gain Button : It makes sensitivity adjustment according to the

FMFS liquid material.

Operating voltage : 220 V ACOperating space : (0,8 – 1,2) x UnOperating frequency (Hz) : 50 / 60 HzRelay contacts : 1 NO, 1NCAmbient temperature : -5 C ; 50 CWarning : Normally burning, extinguishing,

led, during the failure

Connection shape : Perpendicular in the panel or to do terminal rail

Weight : 0,25 kg

Unbalanced voltage : Adjustable %20 or % 40Order code : 9HB-A0000-0000

I

MOTOR PROTECTION, PHASE SEQUENCE and LIQUID LEVEL RELAYMOTOR PROTECTION, PHASE SEQUENCE and LIQUID LEVEL RELAY

MOTOR PHASE PROTECTION RELAYMOTOR PHASE PROTECTION RELAY



Pic-3FSMK Phase sequence and motor protection

-2006 13/3

General :

Operating Voltage : 220 V AC, 24 V AC/DCRelay Contacts : 1 NO , 1 NCContact power : 250 V / 5 A ACWarning : Burning led when the relay is pulled out.Assemblying Shape :Perpendicular screwing should be made

in to the panel or to do terminal rayAmbient Temperature : - 10° C, + 60° CTime Adjustment : 0-30 snOrder code : 9HD-A0001-0030


Phase Sequency and Motor Protection Relays are designed toprevent the failures of electric motors , which are used mostlyin industry systems.

General :

Motor will be switched off if it senses one or 2 phases for anyreason.

1. Phase Breaking :

Motor will be switced off if notr-phase voltage imbalanceovercomes the %20 limit (adjustable %40).

2. Voltage Imbalance :

At the positions of reverse of phase sequence , motor is notswitched on (when R, S and T is on the way of clock) With thechanging of phase sequence motor changing sequence switchesoff.

3. Phase Seqeuence :

FT-30 Time Relay :Works with a delay at induction. T time delay closes the contactafter waiting (0-30 sec) after the application of voltage to therelay.

Pic-4FT-30 time relay

Fig-3


Operating voltage : 380 V AC

Operating space : (0,8-1,2) x Un

Operating frequency (Hz) : 50 – 60 Hz

Relay contacts : 1 NA, 1 NKAmbient temperature : -5 C ; +50 C

Warning : Normally burning, extinguishing, led, during the failure

Connection shape : Perpendicular in the panel or to do

terminal ray

Weight : 0,15 kg

Unbalanced voltage : Adjustable %20 or % 40

Order code : 9HG-A0000-0000

K1

0

I

K1

A1

A2

M

3

1

2 3

21 3

Normal

NRS

T

NTSR

Time Relays which has a very wide usage are very importantfor automation mechanism. Federal Time relays are manufacturedin the below mentioned types.

Technical Characteristics :Operating Voltage : 220 V AC, 24 V AC/DCRelay Contacts : 1 NO , 1 NCContact power : 250 V / 5 A ACWarning : Burning led when the relay is pulled out.Assemblying Shape : Perpendicular screwing should be made

in to the panel or to do terminal rayAmbient Temperature : - 10° C, + 60° C

Time Adjustment : 0-60 dkX1 - X3 : Control input endsX2 - a : 24 V input endsOrder code : 9HD-A0001-0060

Feeding

Contact off

on

t

FT-60 Time Relay :

It is a multi functional time relay. FT-60 time relay can be operatedin the below mentioned operations.

Pic-5FT-60 time relay

FT-30 operating prensible of time relay

PHASE SEQUENCY AND MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYPHASE SEQUENCY AND MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY

TIME RELAYSTIME RELAYS

1313



-2006 13/4

FT-60 time relay can be operated above mentioned ways

A)

feeding

contact offon

t

Induction delay related to feeding voltage

C)

feeding entrance

contactoff

on

on

off

t t

Flashor is opened at first related to feeding voltage

D)

besleme girifli

contactoff

on

on

off

t t

Flashor is closed at first related to feeding voltage

B)

feeding

contactoff

on

t Release delay related to feeding voltage

E)

feeding entrance

contact ont

on

off

t

off

Induction delay related to control entrance, it is active when thecontrol entrance is open.

Release delay related to control entrance, it is active when the controlentrance is open

F)

kontrol girifli

kontak

off

onoff

on

t t

G)

feeding entrance

contact off

onoff

ont t

Induction delay related to control entrance, it is active when thecontrol entrance is closed.

H)

feeding entrance

contact

off

on

off

on

t tRelease delay related to control entrance, it is active when the controlentrance is closed.

I)

feeding entrance

contact

off

onoff

ont t

Release delay related to control entrance, relay is opened when thecontrol entrance is opened. If the control entrance is closed it waitsabout t delay and makes the relay closed.

J)

feeding entrance

contact

off

t

off

t on

onRelease delay related to control entrance, relay is opened when thecontrol entrance is opened and waits for t delay. It becomes closed

and repeats the same operations when the control entrance is closed.

FT 60 TIME RELAY OPERATING WAYSFT 60 TIME RELAY OPERATING WAYS



-2006 13/5

General :

General :

Federal Thermostats are operated by the principle of two typesas on-off and time ratio control method. For on-off method itopens when the temperature reaches at the value which it is setand at the time of decrease up to setting hsyteresys value, itclose and continuous to operate.

Thermostat operates same as on-off method during the 4C0up and down of setting value for time ratio control method. Oninterval values it opens and closes according to selected controlperiod.


Operating Voltage : 220 V AC 50 Hz

Relay Contacts : 1 NO , 1 NC

Contact power : 250 V / 5 A ACPrecautions : Burning led when the relay is pulled out.

Assemblying Shape : From front side to the panel

Oprerating Temperature : - 10° C, + 60° C

Entrance Frequency : Max. 130 Hz.

Counting space : 000000 - 999999

Multiplication frequency : 00.0001 - 99.9999

Reset time : 0.01-99.99 sn

Sensor feeding output : 12 V DC

Dimension : 72x72

Order code : 9KS-D0100-0000

Operating Voltage : 220 V. AC. /50-60 Hz.Measurement space : 0-400 °CPower Comsumption : ≤ 3 WOprerating Temperature : -10 °C, +60 °COperating Compensation : 0-50 °CHys Space : 2 °C - 20 °C (When On-off Control

Method Using)Control Period : 10 sn. – 200 sn.Control Output : Relay (220 V. AC. 3A.)Asseblying Shape : 1- on-off control method

2- Time ratio control methodDimensions : 72x72 (FDT 72)

96x96 (FDT 96)Order Code : 9KT-D0110-0400

9KT-D0210-0400


Pic-7FDT72 Thermostat

Pic-6FS 72 Counter

Federal Counter is the element that makes counting operationsrelated to multiplier factor and impulse entrance. Mistake ratiois very small at counting operations because it is made by the

control of microprocessor. FS 72 can keep program parametersand last values for 10 years in its memory even if the energyis cut. Pulse can be entered to the counter by the help ofencoder, proximity switch and contact. Entrance frequency ismaximum 130 Hz.

COUNTERSCOUNTERS

THERMOSTATSTHERMOSTATS

1313



-2006 13/6

ø 6.5

50

1 0 9

5 7

62

Motor Protection, Phase Sequence and LiquidLevel Relay :

37Ø6.5

5075

1 0 9

60

Phase Sequence and Motor Protection Relay :Motor Phase Protection Relay :Time Relay :

Counter : Thermostat (FDT72) : Thermostat (FDT96) :

7

1

0 8 . 5

1

2 6 . 5

49

65

10 1.5

72

7 2

9 2

96

9 6

8 2

72

7 2

DIMENSIONS OF RELAYSDIMENSIONS OF RELAYS



LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS

C Type Low Voltage Power Capacitors

K Type Low Voltage Power Capacitors

CONTENTS

C Type Low Voltage Power Capacitors

FECSADP

5...30 kVAr

FECSADP

40-50 kVAr

FEK-23

12.5...30 kVAr

FEK-13

5-10 kVAr

K Type Low Voltage Power Capacitors

-2006

General Information About Low Voltage Power Capacitors

MKP Technology

Calculating Methods and Assembling Directions

Technical Characteristics of Low Voltage Power Capacitors

Dimensions of Low Voltage Power Capacitors

2

3

4

5

6

14/1

CONTENTS

LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS

1414



- Decreasing of electrics loses will be provided by the correction

of power factor.

- Network will support the additional load which will be

necessary for the widen system.

- The load will be decrease with the correction of power factor

at distribution and so; the equipment’s life will be long.

-2006

Loads of big networks generally have inductive characteristic.

Asynchronous motors, induction ovens, lamps with ballasts

are decreases the power coefficients of networks, which

inductive current relates them to. Decreasing the powercoefficient causes the loses at the energy conduction and

distribution lines and decreasing the voltage. This operation

also reduces the productivity. Loads, which have low power

of coefficients causes the alternator’s transformers and circuit’s,

part capacities to have big faults. At this position it is impossible

to benefit from the system. Low Voltage Power Capacitors

are manufactured in according to IEC 831-1/2 2 standards

and CE certificate.

General :

14/2

Over warning synchronous motors are used together with

capacitors at correction of reactive powers but usage ratio of

the capacitor is more prevalent than the synchronous motors.

Power Factor of the load defined as the ratio active power to

the externally power. When Cos Q comes near 1.00, less power

is inducted from the network. If CosQ=1, conduction of the

500 kW needs 722 A current at the 400 V three phase mainlines.

Conduction of some effective power at Cos Q= 0,6 will need

more current (1203 A). For this reason, distribution and

conduction equipments like feeding transformers should be

dimensioned for this high load.

- Conduction of the electrical power according to existing

standards is more expensive both consumers and network

distribution.

The other reason of the more cost is windings of transformer

and generator and losses of heating at conductors which the

system’s all-current cause.

- In general conditions when the power of the three-phased

system is decreasing, current is increasing. Heating losses inthe system increases proportionally to square of current rising.

Power Factor :

Opposite capacitated reactive power, which is obtained by

capacitor to the system can be compensated with the inductive

reactive power that the electrical load needed. It assures

decreasing of the reactive power which is inducted from thisnetwork namely power factor correction (PFC).

Methods of Power Factor Correction:

Single or fixed PFC: Reactive Power Compensation of every

load and decreasing the load of feeding end (fixed and/or one

receiver with big power, for loads)

Group PFC: Connection of the one fixed capacitors to one

group synchronic working inductive load (exp. Motor groups,

discharge lamps)

Central PFC: It is used for electrical systems that have wide

connection of some capacitors to main power distribution

station or secondary station with a changeable load.

Capacitors are controlled by the microprocessor based reactive

power control relay that follows the need of the reactive powerat network.

Relay is connected to capacitor to compensate all loads’

reactive power and to decrease all requirements to the network.

Methods of Power Factor Correction :

Result :

Accumulating the electrical load at alternative current circuits

are the materials, which are used to obtain capacitive reactions.

It is formed with a thin insulator and separated two conductor

panels. Electrical Load transportation capacity of a capacitor

is shown as C and it equals to the rate of the difference

between accumulated electrical load at panels (Q= Coulomb)

and potential difference between panels (V= Volt)

C = (Farad)

Capacitors :

Delta Connection of Capacitors :

Capacitor equipments are connected delta to get required power

capacitive unit at L.V.

As a result of experiences it is seen that diameters of the cylindrical

capacitor equipments are selected to have the quality to their heights.

With this application the life of the capacitor becomes 2 times longer.

As heating is proportional to current’s square, reduction is the same.

So, it is being easy to manufacture capacitors, which are operating

at more higher temperatures.

Capacitors can be connected to network or consumer ends (delta

or star) at three phased alternative current systems.If the capacity of the capacitor which is between two lines for delta

connection is shown as C∆ and for star connection the capacity of

the capacitor which is connected to every phase is shown as Cy.

Two zinc-metallizated polypropylene films are winded one

right after the other which are made of pure polypropylene

and used at manufacturing of power capacitors to correctionof consumers power coefficient. One of the films is right film

and the other film is left film. This means being the unmetallized

field left or right. Wideness of the films, thickness of the films,

winding number, active wideness, sliding distance determines

the capacitors capacity value. These capacities:

=

Are calculated according to equation. Here;

C = Capacity (F)

= Insulator ambient dielectric static (for pp film E=2,2 F/m)

A = Field of conductor panel [multiply of active wideness and

length of the film (m2)]

d = distance between the conductor panels [thickness of film

(mm)]

Zinc metallized film is obtained by covering of the

polypropylene film with zinc stream at vacuum. As a result

we get one face conductor and other face inductor film. Zinc

metallized polypropylene film is manufactured with vacuum

technology.

Base field of the cylindrical elements are covered with zinc.

With the help of the two zinc wired pistol and at the right

voltage. It is short-circuited and this material is sprayed to

base fields with zinc pressure air. These zinc particles are

sunk into the space, which exists by the sliding of two films.

The reason of the base fields covering with zinc is soldering

of the base field easily and having zinc cover of polypropylene

film. Contact connection of zinc to zinc should be appropriate.

. A

dC

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORSGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS



1414

-2006 14/3

If it is accepted that Qc power is equal at each two systems,

Cy=3C∆

Capacitor capacity, which is connected to every phase at

star connection, is 3 times higher than the capacity at delta

connection.For this reason, delta connection is 1/3 times cheaper than

the star connection at low voltage systems where the difference

between phase and line voltage is not important for insulation.

Because of these financial reasons triangle connection is

preferred. Federal L.V. power capacitors are manufactured

with MKP technology.

MKP type is formed with a lower power loss dielectric which

is shaped with pure polypropilen foil. Zinc metalized film is

obtained by holding the polypropilen film to the zinc steam

under vacuum. Capacitor elements are dried with vacuum.

After placing the elements to the capacitor body, sticky

polyurethane resin ( mainly includes control oil ) or dry insulation

gas is put.

MKP :

- As a result of simple structure technology, MKP capacitors

are manufactured with using less material and low cost. So,

users pay less in price.

- MKP capacitors are generally simpler in structure than others,although they have a thicker dielectric.

- MKP capacitors have special high capacitance and high a.c.

load capacity.

Long usage life safety is guaranteed with using the above-

mentioned structure and high quality material.

Also, Federal capacitors take less place at capacitor switching

panels with smaller dimensions.

Advantages of MKP Technology :

FEDERAL Capacitors repair the punctures, which exist at low

voltage installations automatically. Arcs that exist during

puncture operation melt the metal stratum and these arcs

isolate the puncture field in the insulator. So, capacitor cancontinue its operating without any problem by reaching full

voltage resistance. Capacity loss is too small so it can be

neglected for this reason.

Self-Repairing :

Protection is provided for overloads with the insulator fuse

that take place into the FEDERAL capacitors. Gas that occurs

frequently because of self-repairing operation causes a high

pressure at the body of the device. As a result of this, cablesbetween the connection terminals and windings break off

from the safety notch when the body of capacitor starts

stretching lengthwise. In this way, the capacitor is separated

from the network.

Protection from over load and failures for the safety of the

capacitor and system is shown at Fig-2.

Protection For Over Loads :

Fig-1 Zinc-Metalized Polypropilen Film

Coil

UnmetalizationedField

One Face Conductive

Polypropilen Field

Contact Stratum

Necessary reactive power for required power factor is

calculated as below:

Qc = P x (tanØ1-tanØ2)

P = Active power

S = Apparent power

Qc = Reactive powerCosØ1 = Present power coefficient

CosØ2 = Power coefficient which is required to reach.

(tanØ1-tanØ2) = Multiplying factor is shown in Table-1.

Calculating the Necessary Capacitor Capacity tocorrect the Power Coefficient :

Fig-2 Before failure

Fig-3 After failure

Safety

notch

Safety

notch

MKP TECHNOLOGYMKP TECHNOLOGY



0.20 3.879 4.017 4.149 4.279 4.415 4.473 4.536 4.607 4.696 4.899

0.25 2.853 2.991 3.123 3.253 3.389 3.447 3.510 3.581 3.670 3.8730.30 2.160 2.298 2.430 2.560 2.695 2.754 2.817 2.888 2.977 3.180

0.35 1.656 1.795 1.926 2.057 2.192 2.250 2.313 2.385 2.473 2.676

0.40 1.271 1.409 1.541 1.672 1.807 1.865 1.928 2.000 2.088 2.291

0.45 0.964 1.103 1.235 1.365 1.500 1.559 1.622 1.693 1.781 1.985

0.50 0.712 0.850 0.982 1.112 1.248 1.306 1.369 1.440 1.529 1.732

0.55 0.498 0.637 0.768 0.899 1.034 1.092 1.156 1.227 1.315 1.518

0.60 0.313 0.451 0.583 0.714 0.849 0.907 0.970 1.042 1.130 1.333

0.65 0.149 0.287 0.419 0.549 0.685 0.743 0.806 0.877 0.966 1.169

0.70 0.138 0.270 0.400 0.536 0.594 0.657 0.729 0.817 1.020

0.75 0.132 0.262 0.398 0.456 0.519 0.59 0.679 0.882

0.80 0.130 0.266 0.324 0.387 0.458 0.547 0.750

0.85 0.135 0.194 0.257 0.328 0.417 0.620

0.90 0.058 0.121 0.193 0.281 0.4840.95 0.037 0.126 0.329

-2006 14/4

The effect time of this current rarely becomes lengthy than 1

or 2 period. At that time, isolation of the metallic foil towards

to capacitor protection is projected to be equal to 3,5 times

of the nominal voltage’s maximal value. Big arcs occur because

of the hardness of the capacitive current breaking when the

capacitors switch off. So, it is important to consider the

selecting of the keys, which are used in switching capacitor

installations, fuse and line connection elements. For this reason

connection elements, which are used at switching capacitor

installations, are different from the ones, which are used at

normal installations. These are selected for higher currents

than nominal currents, which equal to capacitor power.

Special compensation contactors, which are manufactured

by our factory, are advised for usage with compensation

key system. Contactors limit the rising current of capacitors

by the current limiting contact blocks, which they have.

Difference of the FEDERAL compensation contactors from

the general contactors is having a transition block which

has current limiting resistance connected parallel to main

contacts on contactor. So, contactor and the capacitor will

have 2 times more long life.

Example :

Active power : P=1000 kW

cosØ1=0,7 system, lets calculate the necessary capacitor

power to make cosØ2=0,96

Solution with table :

We should intersect the line and the column which are equal

to cos Ø1=0,7 and cos Ø2=0,96 to increase the power factor

from 0,7 to 0,96. Then we find multiplication factor =0,729.

Qc=500 x 0,729

Qc=365kVAr

Solution with formula :

Note: Effects of the events that appear during opening and

closing should be considered when material that is belonging

capacitor-switching installations is selected.

Capacitors induct high current similar to short circuit current,which occurs during the temporary regime when they are

connected parallel and when the capacitors are switched off.

These current’s value and period is related to capacitor power,

inductive resistance of network and specific frequency. If the

key is closed at the highest value of the voltage, current

strokes take the highest value.

Capacitors can be easily assembled by using M10 screw in

every position. Assembly screw can also be used as grounding

connection. Maximum squeezing torque is 5 Nm. Clemens

connections are made by applying 5 mm – screw and

maximum 2 Nm- torque. Cable connection should be made

as it lets capacitor rise minimum 20 mm to make protection

in case of over pressure.

Assembling Directions

Warning! Only copper cable should be used at the

connection of the capacitors.

Table-1

Original

power factor

CosØ1

CosØ2

0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.92 0.94 0.96 0.98 1.00

Multiplier factor for

target power factor (tanØ1-tanØ2)

CALCULATING METHODS and ASSEMBLING DIRECTIONSCALCULATING METHODS and ASSEMBLING DIRECTIONS



-2006 14/5

TypeRated VoltageFrequency

StandardlarMaximum Over Voltage

Over CurrentCapacity ToleranceTest Voltage, terminal / terminalTest Voltage, terminal / bodyInstantaneous flowing out currentDielectric losses

Expected statistical life-time

Protection Class

Category of Ambient TemperatureCoolingPermitted rated humidityPermitted max altitudeMounting positionMountingSafety features

Dielectric

FillingDischarging resistances

FECSADP 13400 V50 Hz

IEC 60831-1/2 EN 60831-1/2, CE Un + %10 up to 8 hours for each days Un + %15 up to 30 min. for each days Un + %20 up to 5 min. for each days Un + %30 up to 1 min. for each daysOver voltages pasting %15 should not beover 200 times than the capacitor's life1.3xIn- 5%+10%2.15xUn AC 2 sec.3 kV AC 10 sec.Max. 200 In0.25 W/kVAr100.000 hours ........... ( class-25/C )

With standard terminal cover : IP 20

With special proctetor: IP 54 -25/DNatural air coolingMax % 952000 m above sea levelAny position possibleThreaded M12 stud at the bottom of the caseOverpressure tear-off fuseMKP- metallized polypropylene film selfhealingSoft resin, non PCBInternal - 1 min. 50 V

FEK 13400 V50 Hz

IEC 60831-1/2 EN 60831-1/2, CE Un + %10 up to 8 hours for each days Un + %15 up to 30 min. for each days Un + %20 up to 5 min. for each days Un + %30 up to 1 min. for each daysOver voltages pasting %15 should not beover 200 times than the capacitor's life1.5xIn- 5%+10%2.15xUn AC 2 sn3 kV 10snMax. 100 In0.3 W/kVAr100.000 hours ........... ( class-25/C )80.000 hours.............( class-25/D )With standard terminal cover : IP 30

With special proctetor: IP 54 -25/DNatural air coolingMax % 952000 m above sea levelAny position possibleThreaded M12 stud at the bottom of the caseOverpressure tear-off fuseMKP- metallized polypropylene film selfhealingSoft resin, non PCBexterior - 3 min, 75 V

FEK 23400 V50 Hz

IEC 60831-1/2 EN 60831-1/2, CE Un + %10 up to 8 hours for each days Un + %15 up to 30 min. for each days Un + %20 up to 5 min. for each days Un + %30 up to 1 min. for each daysOver voltages pasting %15 should not beover 200 times than the capacitor's life1.5xIn- 5%+10%2.15xUn AC 2 sn3 kV 10snMax. 100 In0.3 W/kVAr100.000 hours ........... ( class-25/C )80.000 hours.............( class-25/D )With standard terminal cover : IP 20

With special proctetor: IP 54 -25/DNatural air coolingMax % 952000 m above sea levelAny position possibleThreaded M12 stud at the bottom of the caseOverpressure tear-off fuseMKP- metallized polypropylene film selfhealingSoft resin, non PCBInternal - 1 min. 50 V


Other voltage, power and frequency value capacitors are manufactured for special orders.

5

10

12.5

15

20

25

30

40

50

FKK 13 0.4/5

FECSADP1 0.4/5

FKK 13 0.4/10

FECSADP1 0.4/10

FKK 23 0.4/12.5

FECSADP1 0.4/12.5

FKK 23 0.4/15

FECSADP1 0.4/15

FKK 23 0.4/20

FECSADP1 0.4/20

FKK 23 0.4/25

FECSADP1 0.4/25

FKK 23 0.4/30

FECSADP1 0.4/30

FECSADP1 0.4/40

FECSADP1 0.4/50

7.2

14.4

18

21.7

28.9

36.1

43.3

57.7

72

3x33.2

3x66.4

3x83

3x100

3x133

3x166

3x199

3x265

3x332

65x200

85x175

75x255

85x245

85x235

85x245

90x260

110x245

100x245

110x261

100x300

110x261

100x370

146x220

146x261

146x355

0.75

1.20

0.80

1.60

1.40

1.60

1.60

2.60

2.00

2.60

2.40

2.90

2.60

3.80

4.40

6.00

4

1

4

1

5

1

5

1

5

1

5

1

5

1

2

3

9SD-BA000-0500

9SA-BA000-0500

9SD-BA000-1000

9SA-BA000-1000

9SE-BA000-1250

9SA-BA000-1250

9SE-BA000-1500

9SA-BA000-1500

9SE-BA000-2000

9SA-BA000-2000

9SE-BA000-2500

9SA-BA000-2500

9SE-BA000-3000

9SA-BA000-3000

9SC-BA000-4000

9SC-BA000-5000

Please contact our company for other voltage, power and frequency demands.Expansion of FECSADP1 0,4/5 Type Code: FE: Federal Elektrik, C: Compensation, S: 3 Phases, A: Air Cooling, D: IP20, (K:IP00),

P: MKP, 1: Configuration no., Rated Voltage (kV), 5: Capacitor power (kVAr).FKK 13 0.4/5 Type Code: F: Federal, K: Dry Type (MKP), K: Capacitor; 0,4: Rated Voltage (kV) 5:Capacitor power (kVar)

Highest average value at periods.Symbol Minimum Maximum 24 hours 1 year

25/C 25 °C 50 °C 40 °C 30 °C

25/D 25 °C 55 °C 45 °C 35 °C

Ambient Temperature Categories

Power (kVAr) TypeCurrentIn (A)

Capacity(µF)

DimensionsØDxH (mm)

Weight (kg) Drawing No Order Codes

Tree Phase Power Capacitors: 400 V, 50 Hz, IP 20 (40 kVAr and 50 kVAr IP 00) MKP dry type

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS

1414



-2006 14/6

H + 3 3

H

16M12

35

46

Ø D+5

Ø D

4 7

Ø 1

5 1

M 12

2 6 1

1 6

Ø 146

64

32 M 10

M12

1 6

M10

64

32

4

7

3 5 5

Ø 146

Ø 1

5 1

C Type :

4 5 ± 1

H ± 2

M12 1 2

D ± 1

D+3

3 7 . 5

15.3

H ± 2

M12 1 6

48.3 ±0.8

D±1

K Type :

DIMENSIONS OF LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORSDIMENSIONS OF LOW VOLTAGE POWER CAPACITORS



1515

CONTENTS

FX Series Reactive Power Control Relay

EasyVAr ® Reactive Power Control Relay

-2006

Generation Information and Order Codes About Reactive Power Control Relays

Generation Information and Order Codes About EasyVAr ® Reactive Power Control Relays

Dimensions of Reactive Power Control Relays

2

3

4

15/1

FX5 FX7 FX12

CONTENTS

FX Series Reactive Power Control Relay

EasyVAr ® Reactive Power Control Relay

EV96 EV144

REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYREACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAY



-2006 15/2

Working Characteristics :

It is easy to use of the front panel,there are plenty functions

with 3 keys.- The changes on the choosen function is made by usingup and down keys.- The relay is not effected by hormonic currents.- The breakdown of the condenser or contactors in thecourse of time increasing of the reactive power which isused by institution can obstruct to reach the required powerfactor.In this case the warning will be operated by alarm contactswhich enters in to the term.All of the alarm warning cases can be followed from thefront panel LED’s.It will advisable to connect warning lamp or voiced-warningto the alarm circuit.

General :

FX serial reactive power control unit senses digitally the

system current and measures in a sensible maner the power

factor of the installation. In cases where the values are out

of calculated power factor, capacitor input or output thecurrent. As known C/k value determines the compensation

initiating current, In cases where C/k value is raised

compensation initiating process is slowed down this way in

case where the load is reduced permanently capacitor taking

in and out to the circuit is prevented. Capacitor contactors

are operated through the relay within the device. Such relays

are resistant to temporary current regimes and on off stroke

current and though the filters used in contact tips, arc are

reduced to minimum. Federal relays are manufactured

according to CE certificate.

- The time of the pace stepping: It will be adjustable at 8 – 99

sn sensitives

- The power consumption: 6 VA max

- Weight : 0,8 kg.- Working heat : -10 0C with + 70 0C

- Storing heat : - 20 0C with + 80 0C

- Order code FX5 : 9HA-0000-0005

FX7 : 9HA-0000-0007

FX12 : 9HA-0000-0012

! The fast power factor correction is required in such institutions

(petroleum stations, welding store, plastic covering etc...) It is

advised to keep lower of the pace stepping time.

! Please check regularly to adjustment values straightness and

working in good conditions of the compansation.

! The current transformer of the reactive relay should be put

into the phase which is feeding. For example; if the relay is fed

from the “R” phase, transformer should be onto the “R” phase,before loading after main power switch.

! At the end of the working hours or night hours, there must be

a used fixed condensor where there is very little lighting load.

Factory exit values of the reactive power control relays:

- Cos : 0.99- The time of the pace stepping : 8 sec.- Program : 3

Pic-1 Reactive power control unit

- Type: FX5, FX7, FX12- Working voltage: 220 V (50/60Hz) ±%20(The other voltages depending on the requirements.)- Working current: 5 A continual should be choose from the first panel , 1,2,2 ...... at it’s system , 2 or next capacities, 1,2,4,4 .... at it’s system , 3 or next capacities 1,2,4,8,8 ........ at it’s system 4,next capacities works at the turning system

- The exit contact capacities : 1,5 A- Cos adjustment: 0,95 - 1.00 Enductive.- c / k adjustment: 0,00-1,00 between 0,05 at intervalse.


Connection Diagram of FX Series and EasyVAr ® :

Fig-2

Fig-1


A

A A

M Lighting

Reactiverelay

K

Main transformer

Currenttransformer

...../5A.

Capasitor group

AlertContact

LOAD

GENERATION INFORMATION AND ORDER CODES ABOUT REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYSGENERATION INFORMATION AND ORDER CODES ABOUT REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS



1515

-2006 15/3

Technical Features- Type : EasyVAr- Operating Modes : 1111-1222-1244-1248- Number of level : 4-12- Operating Voltage : 220V(50Hz), + - %20

- Operating Current : 5A continuous- Output Contact Capacity : 1,5 A continuous; 10A surge- Stepping period : between 1-30 sec.- Power consumption : 6 VA max.- Weight : 800 gr.- Operating Temperature : -100C+700C- Storing Temperature : -200C+800C- Cosϕ setting :0,95-0,96-0,97-0,98-0,99 inductive:0, 98-0,99 capacitive- Order Codes :9HA-DF000-B000 (EV96)

:9HA-DC000-B000 (EV144)

General

EV96 and EV144 LCD reactive relay can display the voltage,current, active power and reactive power on the boundedphase as measuring, with cos . Current input is sensitive to

perceive up to 10mA and max.input current value is 5,5A. Ifit is used with 2000/5 current transformer, it can perceive 4Aon the bounded phase. The relay has fairly understandableand easy adjustment construction through the wide LCD screen,because of display all value with their units. All values aredisplayed with current cos accept inductive and capacitivecos limit adjustments. Also capacities which are in the circuitare displayed on the screen.

11

67

8

9

10

3

2

4

5

12

13

14

16

17 15 18

1

Menu button: It is possible to see the values of current, voltage,

active power and capacities as pushing the menu button. Also

for adjusting the reactive relay it is necessary to use it.

Adjustment button: If changing is desired on the value which

we reach by menu button, it is necessary to use this button.

Above-below button: It is used for selecting the adjustment

value.

1. Capacitor groups2. Power Factor3. Cosϕ symbol4. Active Power symbol5. V, A, VAr, kVAr symbol6. Symbol of Stepping Period

7. Capacitive cosϕ8. Inductive cosϕ

9. Automatic switch on/off capacitors10. Warning symbol11. Symbol which shows to make adjustment12. Symbol which shows to activate and deactivate of capacitorsby manual13. Memory symbol14. Number of capacity adjustment symbol15. Switch mechanism adjustment symbol16. Value of min.capacity symbol (*)17. Symbol of Current Transformer primary current value (**)18. Variable symbol (The area where shown all the informationwithout cos )(*) EV144, choosing 9 level distance of 4-12

EV96, choosin 3 level distance of 4-6(**) Because of min. capacity value and current transformerprimary are entered seperately, it is not also necessary to adjustc/k value.

Note: Together with these function features, during the stabilizedof system, EasyVAr can obtain to see real power of capacityif it is switch on/off one by one on manual capacity screen.

Active Power Screen: Amount of active power, which boundedthe phase of reactive relay, placed underthe W or kW unit and cos informationwhen the active power is displayed on thescreen. For correct value, primary currentvalue of current transformer should beentered correctly.

The Value of Current Transformer Primary Current AdjustmentScreen: It is the value of current transformerprimary current, which bounded thereactive relay. For example, for 2000/5current transformer, the value of 2000should be entered. The value will be

displayed with D icon. In order to adjust,adjustment button should be pushed and after the menu buttonwill be displayed the desire value will be taken by above-belowbutton. As the value will be changed by fives for each pushedof the buttons, if the buttons will be pushed continuously, thevalue amount will be increased. In this way, the value will beadjusted by 5000 easily. Factory adjustment is given as 5.

Power of Minimum Capacity Adjustment Screen: The capacitorpower, which bounded as first capacityshould be informed to reactive relay withkVAr unit. It is so important to enter thisvalue correctly for an active compensation.This value is displayed with C icon onLCD. Factory adjustment is given as 0,5kVAr

Screen Function :

ProgrammingThe reactive relay is programmed by four buttons on the frontpanel.

Programming Examples

Pic-2 EasyVAr Reactive Power Control Relay

GENERATION INFORMATION AND ORDER CODES ABOUT EasyVAr ® REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYSGENERATION INFORMATION AND ORDER CODES ABOUT EasyVAr ® REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS



-2006 15/4

DIMENSIONS OF REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYSDIMENSIONS OF REACTIVE POWER CONTROL RELAYS

144

1 4 4

74

65

9 1

4 9

96

9 6

78

63

1 3 8

1 2 0

FX5, FX7, FX12 and EV144 :

EV96 :



CONTENTS

Analogue Panelmeters

Power Analyser

Digital Panelmeters

-2006

General Information About Panelmeters and Technical Characteristic of Analogue Panelmeters

Order Codes of Analogue Panalmeters

Technical Characteristic and Order Codes of Digital Panelmeters

Technical Characteristic and Order Codes of 3 Phases Digital Panelmeters

General Information About Power Analyser

Dimensions of Panelmeters

2

3

3

4

5

6

16/1

FMA 72 - 96 FF 72 - 96FV 72 - 96FA 72 - 96

FPA-100

FYA72 - 96 FYV72 - 96 FYA96-3F FYV96-3F

CONTENTS


Power Analyser

Digital Panelmeters

1616

PANELMETERSPANELMETERS


Power Analyser

Digital Panelmeters



General :Measurement is the comparison of known and unknown gravity.

Ammeter :

Ammeters are the devices which measure the intensity currentof a electrical current (amount of the current which passes

through the conductor). They are connected serial to the

receiver at a electrical circuit. Current of a receiver should

pass inside of the ammeter. The ammeter measures this

current but therefore the current passign should not face

difficulty. For this reason internal resistance of the ammeter

should be low (0-1 Ohm). For the minority of ammeter

resistance, the coil is wound with lesser coil than thick cross-

sectioned conductors. Value that the ammeter measures is

shown with I and it is expressed with A. (exp I=10 A) There

are ammeters which measure both AC and DC instead of

Direct Current (DC) and Alternative Current ( AC). It is very

important that there should be a measurement device of DC

or AC when the ammeter is connected to the circuit. Inducted

highest average current value can be seen with Demandmeter

ammeters in 15 minutes. If it is required, ammeters with

demantmeter can be manufactured in the periods of 5 or 8

minutes. Instead of ammeters with indicator electronic (digital)

ammeters can be manufactured and the usage of these

products are spreading rapidly. Reading with these ammeters

and usage characteristics are similar to the analogue ammeters.

However, it is essential that ammeters should be connected

to a circuit in a serial manner, otherwise they can burn out or

damage it’s circuit when they are connected parallel.

Voltmeter :Voltmeters are the devices, which measure the voltage of the

circuit or the receiver (potential difference). Voltmeters are

connected to the receiver of which the voltage will be measured,

parallel.

Voltmeters are connected parallel to receiver so, the current

can pass through them. Inside resistance should be high for

the minority of these currents. To provide this, opposite situation

to ammeters coils will be used. That is, having more winds

than the thin cross-sectioned conductor. The value, which the

voltmeter measures is shown as U and its unit is expressed

with V. (exp U=220V) There are two kinds of voltmeters. One

is DC voltmeter and the other is AC voltmeter. Also there are

voltmeters, which measure both DC and AC. Much attention

should be paid to this situation before connecting voltmeter

to the circuit. Digital voltmeters are used instead of indicator

(analog) voltmeters. Like ammeters, usage of these products

are spreading rapidly. Because there is less reading failure

with these products, they take up less place and their costs

are decreasing accordingly. Voltmeters are connected parallel

to the circuit. Products are not damaged if they are connected

serially by mistake. But there will be a high resistance at thecircuit because of this. Then the receiver will not operate as

required.

Frequencymeter :Frequencymeter is the device, which measures the frequency.

Frequencymeter shows the number of the cycles in 1 second

and its unit is cycle/second or Hertz. Frequencymeters are

connected parallel to circuit which frequency will be measured

like voltmeters. They are produced for being connected between

phases and neutral-phases.

Measurement Device Classes :Percentage expression of the failure ratio of the measurement

devices at the maximum voltage.0,1- 0,2 Class: devices, which will be used at producing of

measurement devices.

0,5-1 Classes: devices, which are generally, used movable.

1,5-2,5 Classes: cable type devices, which are used at industrial

measurements.

-2006 16/2

1.5

Moving iron

45 - 65 Hz

1.2 x In

10 x In

1 VA

2000 V

Scale vertical position

IEC 60051-2/EN 60051-2, CE

3

Bimetal

45 - 65 Hz

1.2 x In

10 x In

2.2 VA

2000 V


IEC 60051-2/EN 60051-2, CE

1.5

Moving iron

45 - 65 Hz

1.2 x Un

2 x Un

3 VA

2000 V


IEC 60051-2/EN 60051-2, CE

Federal analogue meters are manufactured as class 1.5 and 3.0 according to IEC60051-2 / EN 60051-2 standards and CEcertificate. There is no need to stock for Ammeters due to interchangeable scale system. Only scale is sufficient to have in stock.


Accuracy class

Operating method

Operating frequency

Continuously overload (2 hour)

Short-time overload

Consumption (Max.)

Insulation testing voltage

Operating position

Standards

Dimensions

Type

Measuring wave form

Measuring range From 10 A to 100 A (Direct)From 30/5A to 4000/5A (Current Trans.)

FA 72 FV 72

250 V ve 500 V

1.5

Moving coil

45 - 55 Hz

1,2 x Un, 1,2 x 55 Hz

2 x Un

1 VA

2000 V


IEC 60051-2/EN 60051-2, CE

AC (r.m.s)

45 - 55 Hz and 55 - 65 Hz

AmmetersMax. Demand

Ammeters Voltmeters Frequencymeters

FMA 72

1 A, 5 A Direct (15 min.)X/5 A with current trans. (15 min.)

FA 96

96 X 96

FMA 96

96 X 96 96 X 96 96 X 96

FV 96 FF 96

AC (r.m.s)AC (r.m.s)AC (r.m.s)

FF 72

72 X 72 72 X 72 72 X 72 72 X 72

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT PANELMETERS AND TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC OF ANALOGUE PANELMETERSGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT PANELMETERS AND TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC OF ANALOGUE PANELMETERS



-2006 16/3

TechnicalCharacteristics :

Type

Measurement wave form

Measuring Range

Accuracy Class

Operating frequency


Operating level distance

Permanent overload

Feeding Voltage

DimensionsOrder Code

FYA 72 - FYA 96

AC (rms)

0 -200 A direct

0 -10 A direct,

0 - 9999 A (with C. T)

1

50 Hz

-5°C / 55°C

(0,8 - 1,2)xUn

1,2 x In

220 V AC

72 x 72 - 96 x 969KB-DA110-0200

9KB-DA211-0000

Ammeter

Federal digital meters are manufactured as class 1.0 according to EN 60051-2 standards and CE certificate.

FYV 72 - FYV 96

AC (rms)

0 - 500 V

1

50 Hz

-5°C / 50°C

(0,8 - 1,2)xUn

1,2 x Un

220 V AC

72 x 729KV-DA110-0500

9KV-DA210-0500

Voltmeter

FYA 96 - 1R

AC (rms)

0 -10 A direct,

0 - 9999 A (with C. T)

1

50 Hz

-5°C / 55°C

(0,8 - 1,2)xUn

1,2 x In

220 V AC

96 x 96

9KC-DA210-0000

Ammeter (with 1 Relay)

FYA 96 - 2R

AC (rms)

0 -10 A direct,

0 - 9999 A (with C. T)

1

50 Hz

-5°C / 55°C

(0,8 - 1,2)xUn

1,2 x In

220 V AC

96 x 96

9KD-DA210-0000

Ammeter (with 2 Relay)

DIGITAL AMMETER (FYA72-FYA96)

Federal Digital ammeter obtain to measure up to 9999A (rms) with current transformer,when the current transformer ratio isentered. Ammeter memory is reseted by single button and beginning from this time,min. and max. current value can be seenon the screen. Digital ammeters with relays are produced for industries which requires current l imited.

DIGITAL VOLTMETER(FYV72-FYV96)Federal Digital Voltmeter measure the AC voltage between 0-500V sensitively .It is obtain to seen min. and max. voltagebeginning from reset of memory.

FA 72

FA 96

FMA 72

FMA 96

FV 72

FV 96

FF 72

FF 96

72x72

96x96

72x72

96x96

72x72

96x96

72x72

96x96

Direct

With current transformerDirect

With current transformer

Direct


Direct


9KA-AA120-

9KA-AA121-9KA-AA220-

9KA-AA221-

9KA-MA120-

9KA-MA121-

9KA-MA220-

9KA-MA221-

Order Codes :

Direct

Direct

Direct

Direct

9KV-AA120-∆∆∆∆

9KV-AA220-∆∆∆∆

9KF-A0120-0055

9KF-A0220-0055

Type Dimension Using Type Order Code

: Measuring range of ammeter is written (Amper)Types for direct using: 0010, 0015, 0020, 0025, 0040, 0050, 0080, 0100.Types used with current tranformer: 0030, 0040, 0050, 0060, 0080, 0100, 0200, 0250, 0300, 0400, 0500, 0600, 0800, 1000, 1200, 1500, 2000,2500, 3000, 4000.∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ : Measuring range of voltmeter is written like 0250, 0500.

1616

ORDER CODES OF ANALOGUE PANALMETERSORDER CODES OF ANALOGUE PANALMETERS

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC AND ORDER CODES OF DIGITAL PANELMETERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC AND ORDER CODES OF DIGITAL PANELMETERS



General :

FPA100 Power Analyser is manufactured for measuring the

expended power on 3-phase system. 10 measurement

informations can be displayed simultaneously.3 pieces

programmable relay output allows to take precautions against

the abnormal conditions and with standard RS232 port the

values which measured by analyser can be followed and

registered from computer.

Programming FeaturesBefore using our device which have rich options you should

enter some values. These simple values;

1. Voltage transformer ratio

2. Current transformer ratio.

3. Low Voltage value (When the voltage falls down under the

adjusted value, sending signal of which relay is adjusted by

this function.

4. High voltage value and relay output (if setting value is

exceeded, relay operates.)

5. Low current value and relay output (if it is fallen down from

the setting value, relay operates.)

6. High voltage value and relay output (if setting value is

exceeded, relay operates)

7. Enductive low power factor value and relay output. (If it is

fallen down from the setting value, relay operates.)

8. Capacitive high power factor value and relay output (if it

is fal len from the sett ing value, relay operates)9. Alarm function operate delay after energise as second.

10. Delay of alarm output ,after exceeded the setting value,

11. Network number of device.(1-250,1 is entered for single

using)

12. Communication speed.(1200-2400-4800-9600-19200-

38400 baud)

13. Parity (none, odd, even)

-2006 16/4

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC AND ORDER CODES OF 3 PHASES DIGITAL PANELMETERS

General :

FYA96-3F and FYV96-3F are designed for displaying

voltage of three phases and phase currents without

any selector switch simultaneously. Input of ammeters

is 5A and can be used to display directly as entering

the factor ratio up to 9999.

Federal digital meters are manufactured as class 1.0 according to EN 60051-2 standards and CE certificate.

Technical Characteristic :

Type

Measurement wave formMeasuring Range

Accuracy Class

Operating method

Operating frequency


Operating level distance

Permanent overload

Feeding Voltage

Dimensions

Order Code

FYA96-3F

AC (rms)0 -10 A directly,

0 - 9999 A (With Current Trasformer)

1

Elektronic (ADC)

50 Hz

-5°C / 50°C

(0,8 - 1,2)xUn

1,2 x In

220 V AC

96 x 96

9KE-DA211-0000

FYV96-3F

AC (rms)0 - 500 V

1

Elektronic (ADC)

50 Hz

-5°C / 50°C

(0,8 - 1,2)xUn

1,2 x Un

220 V AC

96 x 96

9KE-DA210-0000

Ammeter Voltmeter

Voltmeters are manufactured according to 3x500 V P-

P voltage and as entering the 0.01-99.99 factor ratio

it can be used sensitively for different voltage

transformer in various area. Voltmeters with indicator

are manufactured optionally and can be manufactured

upon request.

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT POWER ANALYSERGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT POWER ANALYSER



1616

Screen Features :

LCD screen that is illuminated by white light obtain to read

measurement values easly. For practical using andunderstandable, LCD screen is separated 4 main parts. In this

way it allows to watch measured 10 information at the same

time. If these 4 main parts exanimate briefly:

1.Neutral voltages, phase-phase voltages and power factor

of each phase can be seen on 3 digits 3 pieces display which

state on the top of the left side. As pushing single button, this

feature can be changed and measurements units flashes on

two side of digit.

(For example: L1 220V,L12 380V)

2.4 dijit 3 piece display states on the top of the right side andcurrent for each phase, apparent power, active power and

reactive power can be seen. As pushing a single button, this

feature can be changed and measurement units flash on the

right side of digit.

3. 5+3 digit 3 pieces displays state on the bottom of the right

side. On this part instantaneous or total expended apparent

power, active and reactive power can be seen. Also these

values can be displayed as 3-phase total or separately .Here,

power meter can be reseted. As pushing a single button this

feature can be changed and measurement units flash on two

side of the digit.

4.At the bottom of the left side phase angle or network frequency

are displayed.

-2006 16/5

1

4

2

3

Order Codes

Analyzer : 9KG-A1000-0005

Analyzer (with energy option) : 9KG-A7000-0000

Analyzer (200A directly) : 9KG-C1000-0200

For options: 9KG-A7000-0

:Options are written (Recording of

energy meters are standard.)

For 8 level compansation features : 008



For RS485 Modbus RTU features : 400

For 8 level compansation and RS485

Modbus RTU features : 408





Remote control program : YB-000∆

∆ : Number of user.

for single user: 1; for 10 user: 2; for 20 user: 3

Technical FeaturesFeeding Voltage : 220V AC - + %20,50Hz

Measuring Voltage Input : 3x500 V (phase-phase),3x300 V

(phase-neutral)

Measuring Current Input : 3x5(6) A, 3x200A (optional)

Power Consumption : <4 VA

Class : < % 1

Measured Max. Values : 500kV,9999A,99999.999kW (kWh)

(More bigness values can be followed from computer)

Dimensions : 144x144 mm

Function Button :

1. area control button

2. area control button

3. area control button 4. area control button

Enter of simple values

Value reset

General Features-Voltage, current and power information are calculated as total

and separately for each phase on the 3-phase system and

displayed on display or computer screen.

-User-friendly with 3 push button.

- Except the various type of precautions and conditions symbol.

10 information can be displayed on the screen at the same

time

-Measurement values are better than 1% at 4 quadrants.

-Small voltages can be measured sensitively (10V at 300 scale)

-Definition to voltage and current factor.

- Optional compensation up to 8-16-20 levels

-Standard RS232 connection and RS485 network option with

optic insulation

-5A suitable for using X5 current transformer or direct

200A(optional) current input alternatives

-3 piece programmable relay output

-As type of failure and danger, back white illumination flashes.

-Fibber optic connection (optic receiver-transmitter which

information transfer is suitable up to 20km)- Software and hardware which ensure to record energy meter

to data for energy failures.

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT POWER ANALYZERGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT POWER ANALYZER



-2006 16/6

D

D

A

A

B

B

Analgue Panelmeters :

Digital Panelmeters :

A

72

96

B

66

90

C

75

75

D

68 ± 0.5

92 ± 0.5

Dimensions (mm)

72 x 72

96 x 96

C

D

D

B

C

A

A

A

72

96

B

44

55

C

6.5

8

D

69

90

Dimensions (mm)

72 x 72

96 x 96

60

Panel Assembling Dimensions 138x138 mm

DIMENSIONS OF PANELMETERSDIMENSIONS OF PANELMETERS

Power Analyzer :

144

1 4 4



MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONICENERGY METERS


CONTENTS

FMS601-FSM50Single Phase

FTS3 - FTS3H - FTS3KThree Phase

FSM60Single Phase

FMS602Single Phase(Analogue)

FTS3D - FTS3HD - FTS3KDThree Phase

General Information About Multi-Tariff Electronic Energy Meters

Technical Characteristics of Multi-Tariff Electronic Energy Meters

Dimensions of Multi-Tariff Electronic Energy Meters

17/1


CONTENTS

2

3

4

-2006

MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONICENERGY METERS

1717



General :

- Single phased and threephased Federal active electronic

energymeters are produced according to IEC 61036, threephased

active + reactive energymeters are produced according to IEC61268, IEC 61036 standards and CE certificate.

- Federal Energy meters are able to seperate 1 day into 8 time

periods and to designate these time periods as weekdays,

Saturdays and Sundays.

- Energy meters are avaible on LCD display screen that has a

minimum 10 years working life and wide working temperature

range.

- All information about the total energy consumption tariffs, date,

hour intervals are avaible with LCD display screen.

- With LCD display screen, the number has a range of 5 digits

and the decimal has a range of 3 digits and all information can

be read easily from 1,5 meters distance.

- Energy meters have a warning system and this system operates

when the battery life comes to critic level. It perceives the real time

clock damages, front cover and terminal cover opening

interferences ( even the energy is cut off), and notifies this in its

LCD display screen with a code and then it records these

interferences to it’s memory.

- There is a real time clock in the energymeter to evulate the

subscriber’s consumption of calendar affiliation, to apply multi

time tariffs and to realize other application on the base of time.

Energy consumption will be written on daytime bases if the real

clock stops for any problem. The cell that feeds the real time clockon the energymeter has a 10 years operating life and 4 years

shelf life. The deviation value of real time clock is maximum 0,47

second/ date. It can be adjusted to forward or reverse the clocks

authomatically.

8-Tariff periods ( codes) :

a) T1-Daytime (06:00-17:00)

b) T2- Evening (17:00- 22:00)

c) T3-Night (22:00-06:00)

d) T4- Other necessities (holiday)...etc


Federal presents its multi-tariff electronic energy meters which

has been developed by our own R&D Team. Energy meters to

be used for industrial or households porposes are avaible as

single phase and three phase types.

They are produced in accuracy class of 1.Energy meters

produced with time-tariff, can also be used with pre-payment

system.If required it is possible to use with or without card. The

time periods are able to be defined as multi-tariff.

The main objective is to ensure more productive usage by

spreading electric energy into 24 hours and to make the user

become conscious regarding electric consumption.

Energy Meter has 4 tariffs and seperates the day 8 different

times and there can be tariffs for Saturday and Sunday to obtain

the electrics instruction tariff. The main goal at making different

tariffs is to spread the electric energy consumtion equally over

24 hours and to make consumers conscious to how much

energy they are consuming. User can direct the consumption

by checking energy meter’s information. Tariff using will direct

the consumers towards using the cheaper hours of electric.

Federal Multi-Tariff Energy meters :

Voltagesensor

Currentsensor

Battery

CPU+Measurement

Relay (Optional)

RTC (Real time clock)

LCD (Liquid crystal display)

Smart card (Optional)

Optical interface

Led (IMP/kWh)

EEPROM

Fig-1 Technical diagram of Multi-Tariff enegy meters

Because of fast developments for electronic products,

electromagnetic meters transform into electronic meter. Electronic

meters are a solution for following and reducing the losses atclose range.

17/2 -2006

-Illegal connection on distribution network

-Measurement fault

-Changes on electro mechanic meters by users.

Following ,manage and reduce the losses of Electric energy

consumption is possible to measures correctly. Using of electronic

electric energy meters is obtained by laws. Sensitive measurement

and illegal operation are prevented with electronic electric meters.

Reason of Losses :

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERSGENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS



1717

17/3-2006

FMS601

1 phased 2 wires

220 V

10 (60) A

Ø = 8.5 mm

LCD

1000

0.004 Ib

50±%2

Active (Single phased)

1

6 KV, 1.2/50 µs

< 0.47 sec./day

50 Hz / 1 dk 4 kV

27 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m

Contact discharge, 8 kV

%95-20 °C...+60 °C

-25 °C...+70 °C

IP 51 (IEC 60529)

ABS, Self-extinguishing, recycled, High Uv resistance material

BMC ( it has a resistance of Dynamic and Thermal shocks)

Optic port (IEC 61107), smart card (IEC/ISO 7816)

Unerasable memory (EEPROM), battery

Different coefficients at weekdays and weekends (Saturday-Sunday) related to tariff units

Separating 1 day to 8 in the sensetive of minute

Real time hour and calendar (authomatic hour application of summer/winter)

9PE-ABBB1-0060 9PD-ABBB1-0050 9PD-ABBB1-0060

: Direct connected energy meter rated current, : Optional

Type

Nominal voltage AC

(-%20Un...+%15Un)

Nominal (max) current ACConnections

Screen

Test output imp /KWh

Beginning current (mA)

Nominal frequency (Hz)

Measurement type

Accuarcy class

Control input (Voltage Endurance)

Time accuarcy (23 °C’de)

Insulation

Electro-magnetic high frequency

Electrostatic discharge (IEC 61036-4-2)

Relative humidityAmbient temperature

Storing temperature

Protection class

Materials

Terminal materials

Communication

Data protection

Tariff coefficient

Tariff units

Integrated/Calendar coupling clock

Order code


FTS3-FTS3D (Active)

3 phased 4 wires

3 x 220 / 380 V

3 x 10 (60) A

2 x 16 character LCD

Active (3 phased) direct

Ø = 10 mm

1000

0.004 Ib

50±%2

1

6 KV, 1.2/50 µs

< 0.47 sec./day

50 Hz / 1 dk 4 kV

27 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m

Contact discharge, 8 kV

%95

-20 °C...+60 °C

-25 °C...+70 °C

IP 51 (IEC 60529)

ABS, Self-extinguishing, recycled, High Uv resistance material

BMC ( it has a resistance of Dynamic and Thermal shocks)

Optic port (IEC 61107), smart card (IEC/ISO 7816)

Unerasable memory (EEPROM), battery

Different coefficients at weekdays and weekends (Saturday-Sunday) related to tariff units

Separating 1 day to 8 in the sensetive of minute

Real time hour and calendar (authomatic hour application of summer/winter)9PB-ABBB3-0060

9PB-ABBB3-0D60

: Direct connected energy meter rated current, : Optional

Type (3 Phase)

Nominal voltage AC

(-%20Un...+%15Un)

Nominal (max) current AC

Screen

Measurement type

Connections

Test output imp /KWh

Beginning current (mA)

Nominal frequency (Hz)

Accuarcy class

Control input (Voltage Endurance)

Time accuarcy (23 °C’de)

Insulation

Electro-magnetic high frequency

Electrostatic discharge (IEC 61036-4-2)

Relative humidity

Ambient temperature

Storring temperature

Protection class

Materials

Terminal materials

Communication

Data protection

Tariff coefficient

Tariff units

Integrated/Calendar coupling clockOrder code


FTS3K-FTS3KD (Active+Reactive)

3 phased 4 wires

3 x 220 / 380 V

3 x 5 (10) A

LCD

Active + Reactive (3 phased) X5

Ø = 5 mm

5000

FTS3H-FTS3D (Active)

3 phased 4 wires

3 x 220 / 380 V

3 x 10 (80) A

2 x 16 character LCD

Active (3 phased) Direct

Ø = 10 mm

1000

9PB-ABBB3-0005

9PB-ABBB3-0D05

9PB-ABBB3-0080

9PB-ABBB3-0D80

FSM60

1 phased 2 wires

220 V

10 (60) A

Ø = 6 mm

LCD

1000

FSM50

1 phased 2 wires

220 V

10 (50) AØ = 6 mm

LCD

1000

FMS602

1 phased 2 wires

220 V

10 (60) AØ = 8.5 mm

Numerator

3200

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERSTECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS



17/4 -2006

DIMENSIONS OF MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERSDIMENSIONS OF MULTI-TARIFF ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS

FMS601-FSM602-FSM50 (Single Phase) :

FTS3 - FTS3H - FTS3K (Three Phase) :

FSM60 (Single Phase) :

11.75

20.75 10.5

Ø8.5

107

1 6 5

45.5

23

1 3 0

84.5

90.5

165

124 9 2 .

5

2 0 7 .

5

3 0 0

1 1 8

26 113

1 1 3

2 0 0

2 0 7 .

5

3 .

7 5

45

6 0

7.5

1 1 1 .

5

3 0

52.5 60

82.5

2 2 4 .

5

140

149

13415

18

13

4 5 5

6

155

1 8 5

1

1

58.75911.75

51.5

1 5 1

27.75

138130

FTS3D - FTS3HD - FTS3KD (Three Phase) :



1818

EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

-2006

2

4

5

6

18/1

General and Technical Information About EasyPan® Distribution Boards

Order Codes of EasyPan® Distribution Boards

Accessories and Order Codes of EasyPan® Distribution Boards

Dimensions of EasyPan® Distribution Boards

EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

EP1 EP2

EP3

EasyPan ® Distribution BoardsEasyPan ® Distribution Boards

CONTENTSCONTENTS



Federal Easypan distribution boards are used in

residence and industrial establishments for power

distribution, lighting appliances, circuit protection and

over current protection. Federal Easypan distribution

boards are manufactured in accordance with IEC

60439-1 and “ ” in two types as flush mounted and

surface mounted.

-2006 18/2

• Easy Installation

• Easy and Safety Maintenance

• Esthetic design

• Appropriate design for FEDERAL products

• Convertible accessories

• Both fully installed and only busbar installed available

• Circuit Breaker, Switch and RCCB is available as main

circuit breaker

• Available for direct connection without main breaker

• Pan Assembly

• Cable knockouts on top, bottom and both sides

• Light Grey (RAL7032) electrostatic power finish painted,

1,2 mm DKP iron sheet (Galvanized iron sheet or different

colors is available when required)

• Degree of protection IP40

• Phase indication with colored labels: Red (R phase), Yellow

(S phase), Blue (T phase)

Features

Busbar

Main bus connector

Main Circuit mounting plate

Mounting hole

Neutral terminals

Grounding terminals

MCB connection bar

MCB mounting rail

Busbar and MCB mounting plateProtection cover for busbars

Protection cover for neutraland grounding terminals

Terminal cover of maincircuit breaker

Protection cover fordirect contact to busbars

Removable cable entry

General

GENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDSGENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDS



-2006 18/3

Type

Nominal residual current

Rated current

Number of poles

Rated short circuit breaking capacity with fuse

mA

A

kArms

IEC 61008-1 EN 61008-1

Residual Current Circuit Breakers :

FK3

30 300

25, 40, 63

2,4

3

FK30

Type

Rated current (In)

Number of poles

Rated short circuit breaking capacity

A

kArms

IEC 60947-3

Circuit Switches :

FMS

63, 80, 100

2, 3

12 In / 1sn

Circuit switch: Unprotected thermal-magnetic switch on-off circuit breaker

Type

Characteristic

Rated short circuit breaking capacity

Rated current

Number of poles

kArms

A

FMH

B, C

6

6,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63

1, 2, 3, 4

10

6,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63

IEC 60898 EN 60898

Miniature Circuit Breakers :

Rated current - In (40°C or 55°C)

Rated current adjustment range - I1

Rated Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity - Icu

(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 3x415 V

(a.c.) 50-60 Hz 3x240 V

100,125,160,200,225,250

Fixed

35 50 65

65 85 100

Type

A

A

(kA rms)

(kA rms)

F33F31 F32F22F21F11F10

EN 60947-2 / IEC 60947-2

L. V. Circuit Breakers :

63,80,100,125

Fixed

25 50

50 100

63,80,100,125

Fixed

16 20

25 30

1818

GENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDSGENERAL AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDS



: Type of RCCB (0FK3,FK30), : Number ofpoles (2,4), : Rated current of RCCB(040,063).Example: Order code of surface mounted, 18ways, 30mA, 2 poles 40A RCCB mountedEasyPan:9VK-0FK3U1-20409VM- A1-

9VK- A1-

9VK- A2-

9VB- A1-

9VB- A2-

9VM- U1-

9VK- U1-

9VK- U2-

9VB- U1-

9VB- U2-

12

18

24

30

36

Numberof ways

Order Code

Flush Mounted Surface Mounted

Order Code

EP1

EP3

3. Order Codes for EasyPan ® with Residual Current Circuit Breaker :

Type

Installation

Rated short circuitbreaking capacitywith fuse (kArms)3x415 V / 3x240 V

3

3

EP2 3

: Circuit Breaker type (F10...F33), : Ambienttemperature (20ºC:1, 30ºC:2, 40ºC:3, 50ºC:4,55ºC:5), : Rated Current of MCCB (016...225).Example; Order code of surface mounted, 30 ways,F33 225A circuit breaker mounted (Ambienttemperature 40ºC) easy pan: 9VB-F33U3-3225

For ordering Easypan without Circuit Breaker,please indicate the type of circuit breaker andindicate the order code as : 0, : 000Example; order code of easypan without breaker,suitable for the installation of F3 series circuitbreakers, surface mounted, 30 ways: 9VB-F3 U3-0000

9VK- A1-

9VK- A2-

9VB- A1-

9VB- A2-

9VK- U1-

9VK- U2-

9VB- U1-

9VB- U2-

18

24

30

36

Numberof ways Order Code


Order Code

EP1

EP3

2. Order Codes for EasyPan ® with Circuit Breaker :

Type

Installation

Rated short circuitbreaking capacity (kArms)

3x415 V / 3x240 V

16,20,25,35,50,65 /

25,30,50,65,85,100

16,20,25,35,50,65 /

25,30,50,65,85,100

16,20,25,35,50,65 /

25,30,50,65,85,100

EP2

12 9VM- A1- 9VM- U1-

*Without using main circuit breaker the board isenergized by connecting an extension bar to the

main bus bar.

9VM-DDDA1-0000

9VK-DDDA1-0000

9VK-DDDA2-0000

9VB-DDDA1-0000

9VB-DDDA2-0000

9VM-DDDU1-0000

9VK-DDDU1-0000

9VK-DDDU2-0000

9VB-DDDU1-0000

9VB-DDDU2-0000

12

18

24

30

36

Numberof ways

Order Code


Order Code

EP2

EP3

1. Order Codes for Direct Connection* EasyPan ®

Type

Installation

EP1

-2006 18/4

: Ambient temperature (20ºC:2, 30ºC:3, 40ºC:4, 50ºC:5,

55ºC:6)

: Number of poles (1, 2, 3, 4)

: Rated current of MCB (06...63)

Example: order code of 1 pole, B type 16A (10kA) miniature

circuit breaker (ambient temperature 40ºC): 9EB-B1041-0016

Order Codes for MCBs*(For MCB mounted Easypan requirements)

B Type

C Type

6 kA 10 kARated short circuitbreaking capacity

kArms

• For more information regarding circuit breakers, residual current circuit breakers and circuit switches; please check related brochures or catalogues.

9VM-FMSA1-

9VK-FMSA1-

9VK-FMSA2-

9VB-FMSA1-

9VB-FMSA2-

9VM-FMSU1-

9VK-FMSU1-

9VK-FMSU2-

9VB-FMSU1-

9VB-FMSU2-

12

18

24

30

36

Numberof ways Order Code


Order Code

EP1

EP2

4. Order Codes for EasyPan ® with Lock

Type

Installation

12 In / 1 sn

Rated shortcircuit breaking

capacity

12 In / 1 sn

EP3 12 In / 1 sn

: Pole numbers (2,3), : Key rated current (063,080,100).Example: Order code of flush mounted, 36 ways, 3 poles 100A EasyPan:9VB-FMSA4-3100

• Rated short circuit breaking capacity of Easypan distribution boards is similar with the main circuit breaker.

5. Please contact with our company for other combinations

ORDER CODES OF EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDSORDER CODES OF EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDS



Extension bar for direct connection

Order codes

YP-0047

Type of main circuit breaker

Standard

Type of main circuit breaker Order codes

Mounting rail for switch and RCCB FMS

FK3 - FK30

YP-0045

YP-0046

Type Order codes

Type Order codes

Type of miniature circuit breaker Order codes




Number of ways Order codes

Accessories

Number of ways

12

1824

30

36

YP-0021

YP-0022YP-0023

YP-0024

YP-0025

YP-0026

YP-0027

YP-0028

YP-0029

YP-0030

F10, F11

F21, F22

F31, F32, F33

2 kutup FK3, FK30

4 kutup FK3, FK30

2 kutup FMS

3 kutup FMS

Direct connection

YP-0031

YP-0032

YP-0033

YP-0034

YP-0035

YP-0036

YP-0037

YP-0038

F10, F11

F21, F22

F31, F32, F33

2 pole FK3, FK30, FMS

4 pole FK3, FK30

3 pole FMS

Standard

Neutral + Grounding terminals

Terminal Cover

Main bus connector

MCB filler plates(for closing the empty ways of MCB)

MCB mounting pan with mainbusbar

Order codes

YP-0039

YP-0040

YP-0041

YP-0042

YP-0043

YP-0044

YP-0049

StandardLock mechanism YP-0050

StandardTerminal Cover for distribution busbar

YP-0051

YP-0048StandardMain circuit breaker mounting pan

-2006 18/5

12

18

24

30

36

1818

ACCESSORIES AND ORDER CODES OF EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDSACCESSORIES AND ORDER CODES OF EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

EasyPan Busbar System

Features:

-Connection possibility of 250A, 400A and 630A main circuit breaker.-Output possibility as 2,4,6,10 or 12 ways (3 poles)with Federal F10 or F11 type circuit breaker.-Easy assemble-Easy and reliable maintenance-Modular design.-Esthetical appearance-Full equipment

-Shipping possibility in optional panel.-Direct connecting possibility without main circuit breaker.-Marking the phases by colourful sticker.



-2006 18/6

Detailed technical drawing of cable entries :

DIMENSIONS OF EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDSDIMENSIONS OF EasyPan ® DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

235

4 9 0

A

B

C

A

B

C

A

B

C

A

B

C

D D

D D

B

C

C

C

C B

C

C

C

C

B

C

C

C

CB

C

C

C

CCompletely removablecover plate

Diameters of

knock outs (mm)

A: Ø44, Ø50, Ø62

B: Ø28, Ø35

C: Ø18, Ø25

D: Ø39, Ø45

A

A

Sample connection diagram :

36 waysEasypan EP3 Type

R TS

22

3032

3634

242628

8

16

2018

1214

10

46

2

G r o u n d i n g

N e u t r a l

N

N e u t r a l

G r o u n d i n g

N

Maincircuitbreaker

21

29

3335

31

2527

23

7

1719

15

1113

9

35

1

Technical Drawing :

Flush Mounted

H

385

360

1 1

5

h

120

EP1

EP2

EP3

520

630

735

495

605

710

H h

Flush

Mounted

h

120

Surface Mounted

H

360

1 1

5

365

EP1

EP2

EP3

500

610

715

495

605

710

H hSurface

Mounted



1919

-2006

Equipment Panel

19/1

AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT of HEATINGSYSTEMS for PASSENGER COACH

AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT of HEATINGSYSTEMS for PASSENGER COACH

Electrical Automatical Heating SystemsElectrical Automatical Heating Systems

2-3Technical and General Information of Automatical Control Unit of Heating Systems

CONTENTSCONTENTS



-2006

General :

Electrical Automatical Heating system is generally used for

passenger railway cars.

It consists of following parts.

- Equipment Panel

- Main Switch

- Power Contactor

- Low Voltage Relay

- Distribution Fuse

1-Heating System (1000 V)

19/2

Equipment Panel :

Main and Auxiliary Equipment panels are assembled under

the passenger railway car. They have 4mm length and

include stainless steel material. Protection class IP54 hasa security system for touching, dust and water input.

Main and auxiliary equipment panels are given to the railway

car with cable connections made and ready to assembly.

Opening of equipment panel’s cover, under voltage is

prevented with mechanic locking mechanism.

It consists of following parts

- Equipment Panel

- Main Switch- Power Contactor

- Electronic Voltage Selecting Relay

- Level Changing Motor Circuit Breaker

2- Heating System (1000-1500-3000V)

Main Switch :

These switches are manufactured for 50kW heating power.

For 1000 V AC, DC, 50 A

For 3000 V DC, 16.7 A

Main switch mechanism is a cam switch with spring that

has a 90 moment breaking.This mechanism locks the system when the cover is opened.

Switching on is prevented by this way.

Power Contactor :

Power Contactor is used at every electric circuit for

commanding heaters. This contactor is a magnetic polarized

contactor.

Technical Specification :

Type : FEC

Using Class : AC1 / DC1

Nominal Power : 16 kW 3000 V AC/DCNumber of Contacts (Ad) : 1

Auxiliary Contact : 1 open / 1 close < 10 A

Coil Voltage : 24, 72, 120 VDC

Weight : 3,2 kg

Insulation : C group for VDE 0110

There are 8 contactors at equipment panel and there are 6

contactors at auxiliary equipment panel. Auxiliary equipment

panel is manufactured according to orders.

Main Fuse :

Operating Voltage : 3000 V AC/DC

Operating Current : 6 A

Insulated body is manufactured with high ceramic dough,

which has a mechanic resistance of main fuse. Cylindrical

shaped ceramic body is equipped with covers and contact

knives at both ends. Melting wire is pure silver.( it doesn’t

depend on corrosion) Fuses have a normally delaying

characteristic. Quartz sand is used as arc extinguishing

material.

Fuses limit the short circuit current with a high measurement

in a short circuit position and so, they protect the system

against to thermal and dynamical forces.

Main fuses are manufactured as knife fuses and fixed to

equipment panel. Therefore, maintenance operations of this

product are made without voltage applied. When the coveris opened, fuses prevent the contact of the cover plate and

human.

Coil operating voltage is DC. Contactor is manufactured as

C insulating class according to VDE 0110, and as D device

group according to VDE 0660 standards. Operating coil is

bridged with a diot and serial connected resistance to have

protection from over voltage.

Pic-1 Automatical Heating System for Passenger Railway Car

Pic- 2 Power Contactor

TECHNICAL and GENERAL INFORMATION of AUTOMATICAL CONTROL UNIT of HEATING SYSTEMSTECHNICAL and GENERAL INFORMATION of AUTOMATICAL CONTROL UNIT of HEATING SYSTEMS



1919

-2006 19/3

1000 V Under Voltage Relay :

Operating Field : 450-1000 V AC

600-1200 V DC

Open-Close Capacity : 1 A at 24 V DC

Low voltage relay is operating between 450 V AC (600 V DC)

and 1000 V AC (1200 V DC) (±%10) . It directly gives contactoutput. This contact and high voltage is insulated from each

other. This relay is towards to voltage at heating system. If

the voltage is higher than 450V AC (600 V DC), operating

command is issued and heaters switch on. If this voltage is

lower than 300V AC (360 V DC) heaters are switch off.

Distribution Fuse :

Operating Voltage : 3000 V AC/DC

Operating Current : 6 A

Cylindrical fiberglass not flaming thermoset body is used

at distribution fuses. There are connection terminals on the

body and pure silver melting wire and quartz sand as arcextinguisher are inside of the product.

Electronic Voltage Selectivity Relay :

Operating Way :

High Voltage is divided on resistances and sent to four-

measurement step.These are at AC 1000V, 1500V

at DC 1500V, 3000V the steps.

Also, there are two overload measurement levels instead of

these four measurement levels (one AC, the other DC). If

an overload is determined higher than 1850 V AC, 3750 V

DC at both measurement levels, 3000 V position is selected

and heaters are switch off.

With the sign which is obtained from measurement rank,

signal is given to the related transistor, and relay with having

a time delay.

Technical Specification :Operating Field : 650 V AC - 1875 V AC

1000 V DC - 4000 V DC

Operating Levels : 1000, 1500 V AC

1500, 3000 V DC

Battery Voltage : 24 V DC (18-32 V DC)

Level Changing Motor Circuit is manufactured for equipment

panel with group of 8 and for auxiliary equipment panel with

group of 6.Groups that are assembled on to the chassis are

manufactured with transparent and not flaming material and

contacts are seen easily. Level changing motor circuitbreaker has the contacts 1000,1500 and 3000V positions

with the assistance of servomotors by receiving the signal

from the electronic voltage selecting relay and transmit the

electrical energy to the power contact.

Level Changing Motor Circuit Breaker :

Pic- 3 Main fuse

Pic- 4 Distrubtion fuse

TECHNICAL and GENERAL INFORMATION of AUTOMATICAL CONTROL UNIT of HEATING SYSTEMSTECHNICAL and GENERAL INFORMATION of AUTOMATICAL CONTROL UNIT of HEATING SYSTEMS



2020

Technical Information

Selection Of Protective Component For Transformers And Motors With 3 Phase

Selection Of Federal Protection And Circuit Components For Squirrel Cage Asynchronous Motor

Selection Of Federal Protection And Circuit Components For Squirrel Cage Asynchronous Motor

20/1

2

3

4

5

-2006

TECHNICAL INFORMATIONTECHNICAL INFORMATION

CONTENTSCONTENTS



-2006 20/2

Type Test :Test of one or more devices made to a certain design to showthat the design meets certain specifications

Routine Test :Test to which each individual device is subjected during and/orafter manufacture to ascertain whether it complies with certaincriteria

Rated Value :Value of a quantity used for specification purposes, establishedfor a specified set of operatingconditions of a component, device, equipment, or system

Nominal Value :Value of a quantity used to designate and identify acomponent, device, equipment, or system

Current Type:Circuit Breakers are selected for AC and DC current

according to consumer operating in AC or DC current.

Making Capacity :Value of prospective making current that a switching deviceis capable of making at a stated voltage under prescribedconditions of use and behaviour

Breaking Capacity :Value of prospective breaking current that a switching deviceor a fuse is capable of breaking at a stated voltage underprescr ibed condit ions of use and behaviour .

Rated Frequency (f) :The supply frequency for which an equipment is designedand to which the other characteristic values correspond.

Nominal Voltage (Un) :It is the nominal value of network voltage that breaker isused. Nominal Voltage is taken reference for determinationof beginning capacity. Always, Un is the voltage betweenphases in the three phases A.C currents systems. Voltagebetween phases is expressed in three phase circuits.

Rated operational voltage (Ue) :A rated operational voltage of an equipment is a value ofvoltage which, combined with a rated operational current,determines the application of the equipment and to whichthe relevant tests and the utilization categories are referred.For single-pole equipment, the rated operational voltage isgenerally stated as the voltage across the pole.

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) :The rated insulation voltage of an equipment is the value ofvoltage to which dielectric tests and creepage distancesare referred.In no case shall the maximum value of the rated operationalvoltage exceed that of the rated insulation voltage.

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) :The peak value of an impulse voltage of prescribed formand polarity which the equipment is capable of withstandingwithout failure under specified conditions of test and towhich the values of the clearances are referred.The rated impulse withstand voltage of an equipment shallbe equal to or higher than the values stated for the transientovervoltages occurring in the circuit in which the equipmentis fitted.

Nominal Current (In):It is the current value that in nominal atmosphere conditionslimit heating-up and limit temperature is not be overtaken.

Conventional free air thermal current (Ith):The conventional free air thermal current is the maximumvalue of test current to be used for temperature-rise tests ofunenclosed equipment in free air. The value of the conventionalfree air thermal current shall be at least equal to the maximum

value of the rated operational current of the unenclosedequipment in eight-hour duty. Free air is understood to be airunder normal indoor conditions reasonably free from draughtsand external radiation.

Nominal Operating Current (Ie) :Nominal operating current value of a breaker is defined bymanufacturer and this value is related to nominal operatingvoltage, nominal frequency, nominal operating current, andprotection type and using category.

Rated making capacity :The rated making capacity of an equipment is a value ofcurrent, stated by the which the equipment can satisfactorilymake under specified making conditions. The rated makingcapacity is stated by reference to the rated operational voltageand rated operational current, according to the relevantproduct standard.

Rated breaking capacity :The rated breaking capacity of all equipment is a value ofcurrent, stated by the manufacturer, which the equipmentcan satisfactorily break, under specified breaking conditions.The rated breaking capacity is stated by reference to therated operational voltage and rated operational current,according to the relevant product standard. An equipmentshall be capable of breaking any value of current up to andincluding its rated breaking capacity.

Rated short-circuit making capacity (Icm) :

The rated short-circuit making capacity of an equipment isthe value of short-circuit making capacity assigned to thatequipment by the manufacturer for the rated operationalvoltage, at rated frequency, and at a specified power-factorfor a.c. or time constant for d.c. lt is expressed as the maximumprospective peak current, under prescribed conditions.

Nominal Short Circuit Breaking Capacity (Icu ) :Nominal short circuit breaking capacity of hardware is abreaking capacity value that is defined by manufacturer forthis hardware in nominal frequency, a designated powerfactor for A.C or nominal operating voltage for D.C in timefixed. This value is expressed as the highest waited breakingcurrent value (factor value of A.C component as A.C state)in beforehand designated conditions.

Mechanical Life:Hardware is characterized with the number of operating cyclebefore changing of any mechanical parts or end ofmaintenance according to related product standart descriptionabout endurance against mechanical corrosion as unload.But, for hardware which is planed maintenance, normalmaintenance is allowed as manufacturer instruction. Everyoperating cycle consist of a closed operating and come afterthis an opened operating.

Electrical Life:Hardware is characterized with the number of operating cyclebelongs to maintenance condition related product standardwithout repair or changing about endurance against electricalcorrosion.

TECHNICAL INFORMATIONTECHNICAL INFORMATION



2020-2006 20/3

* UVR: Undervoltage Release

Un-Protection

Limeted Protection

Good Protection

Full Protection

Protection State

Operating:Overload at uninterrupted operating

Move forward more long and brake

Stop-Start more frequently

Failure:Stay on two phases

Frequency undulate

Rotor catch in

Move forward with brake rotoron motors has critic stator

on motors has critic rotor

Ventilator partsHigh ambient temperature

Plugged of cooling air

O v e r H e a t i n g

Protection withNH Fuses (orLoad BreakSwitch)

Protection withNH Fuses (orLoad BreakSwitch),Contactor and

Thermal Relay

Protection withNH Fuses (orLoad BreakSwitch) andMotor protection

Switch includesU.V.R

Protection withThermalMagneticAutomaticSwitch includes

UVR

Protection withThermalMagneticAutomaticSwitch and

Thermistor

Protection withNH Fuse (orLoad Breakswitch),Contactor,

Thermal Relayand Thermistor

4.54.54.54.54.54.5

4.54.54.54.54.54.54.5

666666

1.31.6

22.63.2

4

5.16.4

810.112.8

1620.2

19.22430

38.548.1

60

162535507095

120185240

2(30x5)2(40x5)

40x12

40x15

2(40x10)80x15

2(80x10)2(80x15)

2(100x15)3(100x15)

6380

100125160200

250300400500630800

1000

125016002000250032004000

F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33

F12/F33F33/F53

F53F62/F71/F83EF62/F71/F83E

F71/F82E/F83EF71/F83E/F123EF71/F83E/F123E

F92E/F123E

F92E/F102E/F123EF102E/F112E/F123E

F112E/F123EF112E/F133E

F133EF143E

20-6520-6520-6520-6520-6535-65

35-6535-6535-6535-65

35-10035-100

65-100

65-10065-10065-10065-10070-10070-100

FAT30-60/5FAT30-80/5

FAT30-100/5FAT30-125/5FAT30-150/5FAT30-200/5

FAT30-250/5FAT40-300/5FAT40-400/5FAT40-500/5FAT60-600/5FAT60-800/5

FAT60-1000/5

FAT100-1250/5FAT100-1600/5FAT100-2000/5FAT100-2500/5FAT100-3000/5FAT130-4000/5

ShortCircuitVoltage

Usc (%)

3 PhaseMax. Short

Circuit

CurrentIsc (kA)

Coppercross

section

CircuitBreakerRated

CurrentIn (A)

SuitableFederal

Circuit Breaker

FEDERAL max.Nominal Short

Circuit Breaking

Capacity Icu (kA)

SuitableFEDERAL

Current

Transformer

587291

115144180

231289361455578723910

115614451805231229003600

TransformerNominalCurrent

In (A)

40506380

100125

160200250315400500630

80010001250160020002500

TransformerPowerS (kVA)

SELECTION OF CIRCUIT BREAKER ACCORDING TO TRANSFORMER POWER

SELECTION TABLE OF PROTECTIVE COMPONENT FOR MOTORS WITH 3 PHASE

SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE COMPONENT FOR TRANSFORMERS AND MOTORS WITH 3 PHASESELECTION OF PROTECTIVE COMPONENT FOR TRANSFORMERS AND MOTORS WITH 3 PHASE



-2006 20/4

3.55

6.67.78.5

11.515.518.5

2230374460

7285

105138170205245300370408460584

MotorRated

Current

In (A)

----

F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33

F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33F12/F22/F33

F12/F33F33/F53F33/F53

F53F62/F71/F83EF62/F71/F83E

F71/F83EF71/F83E

F71/F83E/F123E

SuitableFEDERAL

Circuit Breaker

----

161625252532405063

80100125160200225250300400500500630

CircuitBreakerRated

CurrentIn (A)

FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160

FSF(FVS)160/250FSF(FVS)160/250

FSF(FVS)160/250/400FSF(FVS)160/250/400FSF(FVS)160/250/400

FSF(FVS)160/250/400FSF(FVS)160/250/400


FSF(FVS)250/400/630FSF(FVS)400/630FSF(FVS)400/630FSF(FVS)400/630

FSF(FVS)630FSF(FVS)630FSF(FVS)630FSF(FVS)630

Suitable FEDERALLoad Break Switch

NH00NH00NH00NH00

NH00/0 NH00/0 NH00/0 NH00/0

NH00/0/1 NH00/0/1

NH00/0/1/2 NH00/0/1/2 NH00/0/1/2

NH00/0/1/2 NH00/0/1/2

NH1/2NH1/2

NH1/2/3NH2/3NH2/3NH2/3

NH3NH3NH3NH3

SuitableFederal

Fuse

Base (FA)

NHC00/00NHC00/00NHC00/00NHC00/00NHC00/00

NHC00/00/0NHC00/00/0NHC00/00/0

NHC00/00/0/1NHC00/00/0/1

NHC00/00/0/1/2NHC00/00/0/1/2NHC00/00/0/1/2

NH00/0/1/2NH00/0/1/2

NH1/2NH1/2

NH1/2/3NH2/3NH2/3NH2/3

NH3NH3NH3NH3

Suitable FEDERALNH Fuse

Height (FB)

610162025253240506380

100100

125125200200250315315400500500500630

NH FuseCurrentIn (A)

1.51.51.52.52.5

46

101016252535

50507095

120120240240240

2(30x5)2(30x5)

2x185

Coppercross

section

(mm2)

1.52.2

33.7

45.57.5

91115

18.52230

3745557590

110132160200220250315

MotorPowerP(kW)

Direct Feeding* :

3.55

6.67.78.5

11.515.518.5

223037

44607285

105138170205245300370408460584

Motor

RatedCurrentIn (A)

Suitable

FEDERALCurrenTrasformer

Suitable

ContactorCurrentIe (A)

Suitable

FEDERALContactor

Thermal

RelayAdjustingRangeIe (A)

Suitable

FEDERALThermalRelay

Motor Protection

Switch ThermalAdjusting RangeIe (A)

Suitable

FEDERALMotorProtection

Switch

FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-40/5

FAT30-50/5FAT30-75/5FAT30-75/5

FAT30-100/5FAT30-150/5FAT30-150/5FAT30-200/5FAT30-250/5FAT30-250/5FAT40-300/5FAT40-400/5FAT40-500/5FAT40-500/5FAT60-600/5

99999

121620253240

50638095

115145185260260300400460460630

FC-09DFC-09DFC-09DFC-09DFC-09DFC-12DFC-18DFC-25DFC-25DFC-32DFC-40D

FC-50DFC-65DFC-80DFC-95D

FC-115DFC-150DFC-220DFC-260DFC-260DFC-300D

----

2.8-44.5-6.3

5,5-87-107-10

9-12.514-2017-2220-2523-3230-40

37-5055-7063-80

75-10595-125

100-160125-200200-315200-315250-400315-500315-500400-630400-630

FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR32

-

--------------

2.5-44 - 6.36.3-106.3-106.3-1010-1610-1616-2020-25

--

--------------

FMK25-4FMK25-6.3FMK25-10FMK25-10FMK25-10FMK25-16FMK25-16FMK25-20FMK25-25

--

--------------

1.52.2

33.7

45.57.5

91115

18.5

22303745557590

110132160200220250315

Motor

PowerP(kW)

*According to IEC 292 standard for 380 V, 1500 or 3000 rotation asynchronous

** Because of high endurance for over load and short circuit circuit breakers have high breaking capacity are prefered

SELECTION OF FEDERAL PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT COMPONENTS FOR SQUIRREL CAGE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORSELECTION OF FEDERAL PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT COMPONENTS FOR SQUIRREL CAGE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTOR



2020-2006 20/5

FMK25-4FMK25-6.3FMK25-10FMK25-10FMK25-10FMK25-16FMK25-16FMK25-20FMK25-25

--

--------------

Suitable

FEDERALmotor

ProtectionSwitch

2.5 - 44 - 6.36.3-106.3-106.3-1010-1610-1616-2020-25

--

--------------

Motor Protection

Switch ThermalAdjusting

Range Ie (A)

1.8-2.52.2-3.2

2.8-43.5-5

4.5-6.35,5-87-10

9-12.511-1614-2020-25

23-3230-4038-5048-5757-6663-80

75-105100-160100-160125-200200-315200-315200-315250-400

Thermal

RelayAdjusting

RangeIe (A)


FC-18DFC-25DFC-32DFC-32DFC-50DFC-50DFC-80DFC-80D


Suitable

FederalContactor

99999999999

1625323250508080

145145185185260260

Star

FeedingRemoteControl

Current Ie (A)




--

Suitable

FederalContactor

999999

1212121616

324050506580

145145185185260260400400

Delta

FeedingRemoteControl

Current Ie (A)




--

Suitable

FederalContactor

999999

1212121616

325050506580

145145185185260260400400

Line Feeding

Remote-ControlCurrentIe (A)

3.55

6.67.78.5

11.515.518.5

223037

44607285

105138170205245300370408460584

Motor

RatedCurrentIn (A)

1.52.2

33.7

45.57.5

91115

18.5

22303745557590

110132160200220250315

Motor

PowerP (kW)

FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25FTR25

FTR32-------------

Suitable

FederalThermalRelay

*According to IEC 292 standard for 380 V, 1500 or 3000 rotation asynchronous

** Because of high endurance for over load and short circuit circuit breakers have high breaking capacity are prefered

Star Delta Feeding* :

----

F22/F33F22/F33F22/F33F22/F33F22/F33F22/F33F22/F33F22/F33F22/F33

F22/F33F22/F33F22/F33

F33F33/F53F33/F53

F53F62/F71/F82E/F83EF62/F71/F82E/F83E

F71/F82E/F83EF71/F82E/F83E

F71/F83E/F123E

Suitable FEDERALCircuit Breaker

----

161625252532405063

80100125160200225250300400500500630

CircuitBreakerRated

CurrentIn (A)

FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160FSF(FVS)160

FSF(FVS)160/250FSF(FVS)160/250FSF(FVS)160/250

FSF(FVS)160/250/400FSF(FVS)160/250/400FSF(FVS)160/250/400FSF(FVS)160/250/400

FSF(FVS)250/400FSF(FVS)250/400/630FSF(FVS)250/400/630


FSF(FVS)630FSF(FVS)630FSF(FVS)630

Suitable FEDERALLoad Break Switch

NH00NH00NH00NH00NH00NH00

NH00/0 NH00/0 NH00/0 NH00/0

NH00/0/1 NH00/0/1 NH00/0/1

NH00/0/1/2 NH00/0/1/2 NH00/0/1/2NH00/0/1/2

NH1/2NH1/2/3NH1/2/3

NH2/3NH2/3

NH3NH3NH3

SuitableFEDERALNH Fuse

Base (FA)

NHC00/00NHC00/00NHC00/00NHC00/00NHC00/00NHC00/00

NHC00/00/0NHC00/00/0NHC00/00/0NHC00/00/0

NHC00/00/0/1NHC00/00/0/1NHC00/00/0/1

NHC00/00/0/1/2NHC00/00/0/1/2

NH00/0/1/2NH00/0/1/2

NH1/2NH1/2/3NH1/2/3

NH2/3NH2/3

NH3NH3NH3

Suitable FederalNH Fuse Height

(FB)

66

1016162025324040505063

80100125160200250250315400500500630

NHFuse

Current

In (A)

1.51.51.51.51.52.5

466

10162525

3550507095

120240

2(30x5)2(30x5)2(30x5)2(30x5)

2x185

Coppercross

section

(mm2)

3.55

6.67.78.5

11.515.518.5

2230374460

7285

105138170205245300370408460584

MotorRated

Current

In (A)

1.52.2

33.7

45.57.5

91115

18.52230

3745557590

110132160200220250315

MotorPowerP (kW)

FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-30/5FAT30-40/5FAT30-50/5FAT30-75/5

FAT30-75/5FAT30-100/5FAT30-150/5FAT30-150/5FAT30-200/5FAT30-250/5FAT30-250/5FAT40-300/5FAT40-400/5FAT40-500/5FAT40-500/5FAT60-600/5

SuitableFEDERAL

Current

Transformer

SELECTION OF FEDERAL PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT COMPONENTS FOR SQUIRREL CAGE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORSELECTION OF FEDERAL PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT COMPONENTS FOR SQUIRREL CAGE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTOR



NOTES

-2006


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/catalog-federal 148/149www.federal.com.tr

“All Over the World”

will be continuous...

New Products

Multimeter Over Current Relay

Single MCB Box Installation Contactor Early Warning Relay

Power Analyser



FEDERAL ELECTRIC Product Range

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Air Circuit Breakers

EasyPan Distribution Boards

Contactors- Contactors For Capacitor Switching

- High Current Contactors

Low Voltage Power Capacitors

Cam Switches

Relays- Reactive Power Control Units

- Motor Protection,

- Phase Sequence and Liquid Level Relays

- Phase Protection Relays

- Ground Fault Relay

- Thermal Overload Relays

- Timers

- Counters

- Thermostats

catalog federal

Documents